Home

ZyXEL IES-1000 User's Manual

1. MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION facility lt facility gt Sets the syslog facility server lt ip gt Sets the syslog server IP secured host Shows the secured host enable disable Enables or disables checking for the secured host add lt hostIp gt Adds a secured host delete lt hostIp gt Deletes a secured host date date lt YYYY gt lt MM gt lt DD gt Sets or show the date and time lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt uptime Shows the system uptime version Shows the system version information vlanlg config save Saves the VLAN settings to nonvolatile memory list Shows the run time VLAN settings reset Reloads the VLAN settings from nonvolatile memory dvlan getentry lt vid gt Shows the dynamic VLAN status for the specified entry list Shows all dynamic VLAN status svlan setentry lt vid gt lt portNo gt Sets a static VLAN entry to normal tagged setentry lt vid gt lt portNo gt Sets a static VLAN entry to lt ad_control gt lt ad_control gt tagged setentry lt vid gt lt portNo gt Sets a static VLAN entry to lt ad_control gt lt tag_control gt lt ad_control gt and tagged or untagged setname lt vid gt lt name gt Sets a name of a specific static VLAN delentry lt vid gt Deletes a static VLAN table entry getentry lt vid gt Shows the static VLAN setting for the specified entry getname lt vid gt Displays the name of a
2. MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION lt n gt Shows buffer lt n gt in the current buffer pool steal lt num gt Steals lt num gt buffers from the current buffer pool version Displays version information for the buffer driver bun version Displays the bun driver s version build Shows information on the bun driver s build config lt config_spec gt Enters manual configuration request to bun driver list config Shows all configuration requests devices Shows all registered bun device drivers ports Shows all registered bun ports channels lt portName gt Shows all enabled channels on the specified port all opened channels lt portName gt Shows open channels on the specified port spices Shows all available spices objects Shows all data objects show system Shows system attributes device lt deviceName gt Shows device information for the specified device port lt portName gt Shows information for the specified port channel lt portName gt lt channelNo gt Shows information on the specified channel of the specified port set system Sets system attributes port lt portName gt lt attr gt Sets a port attribute lt value gt channel lt portName gt lt channelNo gt Sets a channel attribute lt attr gt lt value gt reset port lt portName gt Resets port hardware list classes Displays available port classes show class lt className gt Displays a class s members e
3. Diagram 3 RJ 11 4P4C Console Port Pin Assignments RJ 11 6P2C SHDSL Ports on the SAM1008 and ADSL USER or CO Ports on the AAM1008 Pin Assignments Diagram 4 RJ 11 6P2C SHDSL Port Pin Assignments PIN Assignments E IES 1000 User s Guide Note that a 2 4 or 6 pin connector can be used with this port provided pins 3 and 4 connect to a SAM1008 SHDSL port RJ 45 LAN Port Pin Assignments E ED Y Ga DTD DW GC Diagram 5 RJ 45 LAN Port Pin Assignments 1 TX 8 Not Connected 2 TX 7 Not Connected 3 RX 6 RX 4 Not Connected 5 Not Connected F PIN Assignments IES 1000 User s Guide Appendix D Hardware Specifications Physical Interfaces IES 1000 e e e Two slots for a total of up to two hot swappable DSL network modules Power receptacle 19 1U rack mountable wall mountable unit Each network module has one mini RJ 11 console port for local configuration and management SAM1008 G SHDSL Network Module Eight RJ 11 6P2C interfaces for G SHDSL service that conform to the G 991 2 standard One mini RJ 11 4P4C interface for local console connection One RJ 45 10 100Base TX auto negotiation interface This Fast Ethernet port is compliant with IEEE802 3 and IEEE802 3u standards LED indicators for system status overheat warning ALM 10 100M Ethernet LAN and G SHDSL interface status AAM1008 ADSL Network Modul
4. Dynamic seconds 00 00 04 a0 00 31 is Dynamic is 91 seconds old 00 00 04 80 00 34 is Dynamic is 163 seconds old 00 00 1c d4 ae 04 is Dynamic is 269 seconds old 00 00 ic de Sb 32 is Dynamic is 13 seconds old 00 00 85 0b6b 61 30 is Dynamic is 11 seconds old 00 00 86 47 11 91 is Dynamic is 85 seconds old 00 00 e2 82 90 b5 is Dynamic is 117 seconds old 00 00 e2 82 cb d3 is Dynamic is 266 seconds old 00 00 e2 66 be 7b is Dynamic is 64 seconds old 00 00 e2 93 68 06 is Dynamic is 19 seconds old 00 00 e8 7 14 80 is Dynamic is 29 seconds old 00 00 66 62 30 5b is Dynamic is 143 seconds old 00 00 e5 86 2f 51 is Dynamic is 56 seconds old 00 00 e8 89 82 f9 is Dynamic is 12 seconds old Port E Refresh Flush FlushAll Figure 10 12 Bridge MAC Address Record 10 12 Getting Started Screens IES 1000 User s Guide The following table describes this screen Table 10 11 Bridge MAC Address Record LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen Setup Aging Enter a time from 10 to 1 000 000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC Time addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned Port Select a port from and click Refresh to display that port s MAC address listings Refresh Click this button to update the MAC address listings Flush Click this button to clear the MAC address listings
5. Figure 11 4 Ethernet Port Setup The following table describes this screen Table 11 5 Ethernet Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Setup Click this link to go to the Port Setup screen Mode Use the drop down list box to select a speed and duplex setting for the Ethernet port In 10 100Mbps Fast Ethernet the speed can be 10Mbps or 100Mbps The duplex mode can be Half meaning traffic is transmitted in one direction at a time or Full meaning traffic is simultaneously transmitted in both directions Select Auto to have the Ethernet port auto negotiate with a peer to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode Default 802 1p Type the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority tag Priority 11 8 ADSL Module Port Setup IES 1000 User s Guide Table 11 5 Ethernet Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Default VLAN Type the Port VLAN ID PVID from 1 to 4094 The IES 1000 assigns the PVID to untagged ID frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this port GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network The IES 1000 propagates VLAN information to other devices when this check box is selected VLAN Select All if you want the port to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames on this Acceptable port Choose Tagged if you want t
6. ADSL Module Port Setup 11 5 IES 1000 User s Guide ADSL Profile Add or Edit Screen Click the Profile Setup link in the Port Setup screen to go to the Profile Setup screen Click the Add button in the Profile Setup screen to add a new profile or click the name of an existing profile to edit the profile Add ADSL Profile Profile Name Latency Mode fast interleave Up Stream Down Stream Max Rate Kbps 512 2048 Min Rate Kbps 32 32 Latency Delay ms 4 4 Max SNR db 31 31 Min SNR db o fo Target SNR db 6 6 Apply Reset Figure 11 3 ADSL Add Profile Table 11 4 ADSL Add Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Setup Click this link to go to the Port Setup screen Profile Name When editing a profile this is the name of this profile When adding a profile type a name for the profile Latency Mode This field sets the ADSL latency mode for the ports that use this profile Select fast mode to use no interleaving and have faster transmission a fast channel This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary Select interleave mode to use interleave delay when transmission error correction Reed Solomon is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line Up Stream The following parameters relate to upstream transmissions Max Rate Kbps Type a maximum upstream transfer rate for this profile Speed
7. Table 11 2 ADSL Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Setup Click this link to go to a screen for setting up DSL profiles Port Number This field shows 0 for the Ethernet port Active This field shows whether or not this port is enabled the Ethernet port is always enabled Name This field displays the port s descriptive name if one has been configured Auto Neg This field shows whether auto negotiation is turned on Yes or not No The Speed and Duplex fields display N A when the auto negotiation is turned on Speed This is the speed of the Ethernet connection Duplex The duplex mode can be half meaning traffic is transmitted in one direction at a time or full meaning traffic is simultaneously transmitted in both directions Port Number This field identifies the port s index number Active This field shows whether the port is turned on Yes or not No The factory default of all ADSL ports is disabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Profile This field shows which profile is assigned to this port Mode This field shows to which ADSL operational mode the port is set Sa This field shows the maximum upstream speed that is configured for this port asia sae This field shows the maximum downstream speed that is configured for this port Channels This field displays the number of PVCs Permanent Virtual Circuits that are configured for this
8. This command allows you to set the name of your IES 1000 The previous setting will be cleared if the command is entered with the lt name gt parameter omitted 23 3 3 Set Contact Command Syntax 23 2 System Commands IES 1000 User s Guide 192 168 1 1 sys gt set contact lt name gt This command allows you to set the name of the contact person for your IES 1000 The previous setting will be cleared if the command is entered with the name omitted 23 3 4 Set Location Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt set location lt name gt This command allows you to set the location of your IES 1000 The previous setting will be cleared if the command is entered with the location omitted 23 3 5 Set Mode Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt set mode lt fast normal gt where fast Fast makes use of the tag subset of the IEEE 802 1Q standard to identify the source port of a frame and speed traffic through a service gateway normal Normal switches frames using a layer 2 switch IEEE 802 1D transparent bridge standard Use normal mode when you are using a regular gateway This command lets you set the network module into fast or normal mode Determine which mode you are using by entering the info command Fast mode allows only one port per PVID Use normal mode and the 802 1Q VLAN commands see Chapter 31 to configure VLANs or PVIDs with multiple ports Enable fast mode only when you are using a service g
9. 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show vcp gold 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show vcps VC profile name Encap AAL Class PCR CDVT SCR MCR BT NRM a lic aal5 cbr 300000 Figure 26 1 Show VCP Command Example 26 2 5 Show VCPs Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show vcps Displays the contents of all of the virtual channel profiles See the following example 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show vcps VC profile name Encap AAL PCR CDVT SCR MCR BT NRM DEFVAL aal5 ubr Gi DEFVAL VC aal5 ubr x gold aal5 cbr 300000 5 Figure 26 2 Show VCPs Command Example Virtual Channel Management 26 3 IES 1000 User s Guide 26 3 PVC Channels Channels also called Permanent Virtual Circuits or PVCs let you set priorities for different services or subscribers You can define up to eight channels on each DSL port and use them for different services or levels of service You set the PVID that is assigned to untagged frames received on each channel You also set an IEEE 802 1p priority for each of the PVIDs In this way you can assign different priorities to different channels and consequently the services that get carried on them or the subscribers that use them Use the following commands to define channels 26 3 1 Set Channel Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt pvid gt lt priority gt lt vc
10. Port GSHDSL1 vPI M Active W Super Channel pio Priority SS Apply Reset Figure 13 6 DSL Port Channel Add Table 13 4 DSL Port Channel Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Channel Setup Click this link to go to the port s Channel Setup screen VPI Type the Virtual Path Identifier for this port VCI Type the Virtual Circuit Identifier for this port Active Select this check box to turn on the channel Super Channel The IES 1000 forwards frames belonging to VLAN groups that are not assigned to specific channels to the super channel Enable the super channel option to have this channel forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels The super channel functions in the same way as the channel in a single channel environment PVID This is the PVID Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on this channel You cannot configure a PVID for a super channel Priority Type the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag You cannot configure a priority for a super channel VC Profile Use the drop down list box to select a VC profile to assign to this channel 13 10 Virtual Channel Management IES 1000 User s Guide Table 13 4 DSL Port Channel Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these change
11. Wait for the update to finish The network module will restart automatically 35 2 Configuration Backup Restore IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 36 Firmware Upload and Recovery This chapter describes how to load new firmware onto your device or recover firmware that is in the non volatile memory The network modules use FTP to upload firmware and no longer support TFTP uploads If the firmware in the non volatile memory is damaged the network module uses BOOTP TFTP to recover the firmware The differences between these two methods are as follows Upload timing An FTP upload is done during operation run time while a BOOTP TFTP recovery is done when the network module is restarted Protocols used An FTP upload uses FTP protocol while a BOOTP TFTP recovery uses BOOTP and TFTP protocols Remote upload An FTP upload does not require the network module and your computer to be on the same LAN while a BOOTP TFTP recovery does Firmware files used An FTP upload uses a file with an img extension name while a BOOTP TFTP recovery uses a file with a bin extension name The role of the network module An FTP upload uses the network module s built in FTP server and a BOOTP TFTP recovery uses the network module s built in BOOTP TFTP client The impact to the network module An FTP upload overwrites the network module s firmware only while a BOOTP TFTP recovery overwrites the network m
12. lt txvci gt lt rxvpi gt lt rxvci gt Sets the PVC configuration to the specified ADSL port 22 10 Commands Introduction IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION pvcs lt muxMode gt lt txvpi gt lt txvci gt lt rxvpi gt lt rxvci gt Sets the PVC configuration to all ADSL ports vcp lt profile name gt lt encap gt lt aal gt lt class gt lt pcr gt lt cdvt gt lt scr mcr gt lt bt nrm gt Creates a VC profile delete profile lt profile gt Deletes the specified profile ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Deletes the specified PVC channel chs lt start port gt lt stop Deletes all PVC channels for the port gt specified ports vcp lt profile name gt Deletes a specific VC profile vcps Deletes all VC profiles except the DEFVAL profile show profile lt profile gt Shows the contents of the specified profile profiles Shows the contents of all profiles port lt port gt Shows the line status of the specified ADSL port ports Shows the line status of all ADSL ports pvc lt portNo gt Shows the PVC configuration of the specified ADSL port pvcs Shows the PVC configuration of all ADSL ports ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Shows the contents of the specified PVC channel chs lt start port gt lt stop Shows the contents of all PVC port gt chan
13. 2 Make sure the computer behind the DSL device has the correct gateway IP address configured 3 Check the VLAN configuration of the Ethernet port on the network module refer to Chapter 28 4 Check the cable and connections between the IES 1000 and the local server 5 Try to access another local server If data can be transmitted to a different local server the local server that could not be accessed may have a problem 37 9 SNMP The SNMP manager server cannot get information from the network module Table 37 9 Troubleshooting SNMP STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Ping the network module from the SNMP server If you cannot change the cable or IP configuration see Chapter 33 2 Check to see that the community or trusted host in the IES 1000 matches the SNMP server s community If these steps fail to correct the problem contact the distributor 37 10 Telnet I cannot telnet into the network module Table 37 10 Troubleshooting Telnet STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION Make sure that a telnet session is not already operating The network module will only accept one Telnet session at a time Ping the network module from your computer If you are able to ping the network module but are still unable to telnet contact the distributor If you cannot ping the network module check the IP addresses in the network module and your computer Make sure that both IP addresses are located in the same subnet
14. ADSL is an acronym for Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line This user s guide covers the IES 1000 chassis AAM 1008 61 63 and SAM 1008 network modules See the AAM 1212 User s Guide for information on the AAM 1212 51 53 network modules 1 1 Features Two Slot Chassis The IES 1000 has two slots that accept multiplexer network modules The chassis design gives you the flexibility to initially install a single module and then add another as demand increases Multiplexer Network Modules Up to two hot swappable multiplexing network modules may be installed in each IES 1000 chassis The SAM1008 G SHDSL Access Module is an 8 port G SHDSL multiplexer network module that aggregates traffic from eight lines to an Ethernet port The AAM1008 ADSL Access Module is an 8 port ADSL multiplexer network module that aggregates traffic from eight lines to an Ethernet port and has integrated splitters to allow voice and ADSL to be carried over the same phone line wiring 10 100 Mbps Auto negotiating Ethernet Port This 10 100 Mbps auto negotiating Ethernet port connects the IES 1000 to an Ethernet network With Ethernet as the backbone you can create a network that provides G SHDSL and or ADSL service to hundreds of subscribers GSHDSL Compliance SAM1008 e ITU T G 991 2 e Ghs ITU T G 994 1 e Rate adaptation support ADSL Compliance AAM1008 e Multi Mode ADSL standard G dmt ITU T G 992 1 Getting to Know the IES 1000 1 1 IES
15. Fast Mode Setting yi i Figure 10 2 Bridge Setup The following table describes this screen Table 10 2 Bridge Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Operating Mode Bridge Mode Choose Normal or Fast from the drop down list box The Normal mode supports 802 1Q tagged VLAN enabled in VLAN Setup which allows tagged untagged frames to and from all ports The Fast mode allows tagged frames on the LAN port and untagged frames on the ADSL ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Normal Mode Setting Packet Type Filter Click this link to go to a screen for editing the packet filter type for each port Port Filter Click this link to go to a screen for editing each port s egress outgoing ports MAC Filter Click this link to go to a screen for editing the MAC filtering for each port Getting Started Screens 10 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 2 Bridge Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Count Filter Click this link to go to a screen for setting limits on how many MAC addresses may be dynamically learned or statically configured on a port MAC Address Click this link to show the filtering database for each port Record IGM
16. Figure 4 2 Mounting the IES 1000 on a Rack JOOOOCOSs BD DOn DDOD O l Y i k Step 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack Step 3 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack Hardware Installation 4 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 5 Removing and Installing Network Modules This chapter shows you how to remove and install network modules Each IES 1000 accommodates up to two network modules Remove and install modules via the front of the IES 1000 The figure below shows the front view of a SAM1008 network module the procedures for removing and installing AAM1008 network modules are the same Figure 5 1 IES 1000 G SHDSL SAM1008 Network Module 5 1 Removing a G SHDSL SAM1008 Network Module Step 1 Loosen the two screws on the front panel that secure the module to the chassis by turning them counter clockwise as shown next N m a eOOOO 0000 Figure 5 2 Loosen Module Screws Step 2 Gently pull the network module out of the chassis as shown next Removing and Installing Network Modules 5 1 IES 1000 User s Guide Figure 5 3 Removing a Network Module from the IES 1000 Chassis 5 2 Installing a Network Module Step 1 Hold the module with the network ports facing you and insert it into an empty slot located on the front of the IES 1
17. IES 1000 User s Guide ID 1 2 3 4 Bridge IGMP Snooping Setup IGMP Snooping Timeout 300 IGMP Snooping Mode enable unknown flood Apply VLAN ID Group IP Address MAC Address Member Ports 0 224 0 1 1 00 01 01 E 0 224 0 1 22 00 01 16 E 0 224 0 1 24 00 01 18 E 0 239 255 255 250 7fffa E Refresh FlushAll Figure 10 13 Bridge IGMP Snooping Record The following table describes this screen Table 10 12 Bridge IGMP Snooping Record LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen IGMP Snooping Specify how long the IES 1000 is to retain entries in the group membership table Timeout IGMP Snooping Mode Select enable unknown flood to have the IES 1000 only forward group multicast traffic to ports that are members IGMP packets for multicast groups that the IES 1000 has not learned are flooded to all of the IES 1000 s ports This reduces the amount of multicast traffic passing through your switch Select enable unknown discard to have the IES 1000 only forward group multicast traffic to ports that are members The IES 1000 drops IGMP packets that are destined for multicast groups that the IES 1000 has not learned Selecting enable unknown discard results in less multicast traffic passing through your switch than if you select enable unknown flood Select disable to treat multicast traffic in the same manner as broadcast traffic that is it is forwarded to all
18. SCR MCR The Sustained Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR SCR applies with the rt vbr and nrt vbr traffic classes Minimum Cell Rate MCR is the minimum rate at which the sender can send cells MCR applies with the abr traffic class BT NRM Burst Tolerance BT sets a maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards Type the BT here BT applies with the rt vbr and nrt vbr traffic classes The Number of Resource Management NRM cells sets the maximum number of cells a source may send for each forward Resource Management cell Type the NRM here NRM applies with the abr traffic class Add Click this button to configure a new channel Delete Select a channel s Delete check box and click the Delete button to remove the channel 13 4 4 DSL Port Channel Add or Edit Screen Do the following to open the DSL Port Channel Add or Edit screen Step 1 Click a DSL port s index number in the Port Setup screen to go to the DSL Port Setup screen Step 2 Click Channel Setup in the DSL Port Setup screen to go to the port s Channel Setup screen Step 3 Click the Add button in the Channel Setup screen to add a new channel or click an existing channel s link in the VPI VCI column to edit the channel Virtual Channel Management 13 9 IES 1000 User s Guide Add Channel Setup
19. connections between MDF 1 and the TELCO exists Contact your telephone company for troubleshooting B Connect a telephone to the upper port of MDF 2 If there is no dial tone then the problem is between MDF 1 and MDF 2 Check the telephone wire and connections between MDFs 1 and 2 Hardware Troubleshooting IES 1000 User s Guide Table 8 7 Testing In house Wiring STEP TEST Disconnect the telephone wire from CO Connect a telephone to the telephone wire If there is no dial tone then the problem is between your device and MDF 2 Check the telephone wire s pin assignments refer to the appendices for the proper pin assignments Replace the telephone wire if the pin assignments are OK and there is still no dial tone Reconnect the telephone wire to CO Disconnect the telephone wire from USER Connect a telephone to USER refer to the appendices for the proper pin assignments If there is no dial tone your device s internal splitter may be faulty contact your vendor Reconnect the telephone wire to USER Connect a telephone to a lower port of MDF 3 If there is no dial tone then the problem is between your device and MDF 3 Check the pin assignments of the telephone wire s connector that connects to USER Replace the telephone wire connecting your device to MDF 3 If there is no dial tone then MDF 3 may be faulty Contact the telephone company if that is the case Disconnect
20. 35 2 Configuration Backup You can backup all or some configuration files from the network module to your computer Backup the system configuration by following the example shown next Connect to the network module with your favorite FTP client The command for the network module is generally C gt ftp lt network module IP address gt at the computer command prompt Enter the User name just press ENTER User lt ENTER gt Enter the management password 1234 by default Password 1234 230 Logged in Get the configuration files from the network module ftp gt get init Quit FTP ftp gt quit 35 3 Configuration Restore You can restore configuration files from your computer to the network module Restore the system configuration by following the example shown next Configuration Backup Restore 35 1 IES 1000 User s Guide Do not turn off the network module during the restore process as it may corrupt the firmware and make your network module unusable Connect to the network module with your favorite FTP client The command for the network module is generally C gt ftp lt network module IP address gt at the computer command prompt Enter the User name just press ENTER User lt ENTER gt Enter the management password 1234 by default Password 1234 230 Logged in Transfer the configuration files to the network module ftp gt put init Quit FTP ftp gt quit
21. Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen Port Number Click an entry to go to a screen to edit the egress ports for that port Egress Port This field displays the forwarding ports for this port Edit Bridge Port Filter Setup Screen Click a port link in the Bridge Port Filter Setup screen to open this screen 10 6 Getting Started Screens IES 1000 User s Guide Edit Bridge Port Filter Setup Ethernet Egress Port All r Apply Reset Figure 10 6 Edit Bridge Port Filter Setup The following table describes this screen Table 10 5 Edit Bridge Port Filter Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen Bridge Port Filter Click this link to go to the Bridge Port Filter Setup screen Setup All Select this check box to forward packets to all ports E Select this check box to forward packets to the Ethernet port 1 8 Select one or more of these check boxes in order to forward packets to specific DSL ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 5 2 MAC Filter Setup Screen Click MAC Filter S
22. Do not select this check box unless the IP address that you are using to manage the IES 1000 is already configured as one of the client addresses below The IES 1000 blocks your access if you apply this page with this check box selected and your IP address is not one of the configured client addresses Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link in the navigation panel on the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Address The address of a client that is permitted to use a service Telnet FTP Web to manage the IES 1000 For example 192 168 1 100 Add Click this button to configure a new secured client entry Delete Select a secured client entry s s Delete check box and click the Delete button to remove the entry Add Secured Client Screen Click Maintenance in the navigation panel and then Secured Client in the Maintenance screen Click Add in the Secured Client Setup screen to open the Add Secured Client screen Use the Add Secured Client screen to configure the IP addresses that an administrator can use to manage the IES 1000 Add Secured Client Secured Client Address Apply Reset Figure 18 3 Add Secured Client The following table describes this screen Table 18 3 Add Secured Client
23. Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt enable ports The enable ports command forcibly enables all ADSL ports The factory default of all ports is disabled A port must be enabled before data transmission can occur An enabled but disconnected ADSL port generates more heat than an operating port To minimize heat generation and to enhance reliability remember to disable a port when it is not in use 24 3 6 Linedata Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt linedata lt port number gt where lt port number gt A port number from to 8 The linedata command shows the line bit allocation of an ADSL port Discrete Multi Tone DMT modulation divides up a line s bandwidth into tones This command displays hexadecimal digits that indicate the number of bits transmitted for each tone This can be used to determine the quality of the connection whether a given sub carrier loop has sufficient margins to support ADSL transmission rates and possibly to determine whether certain specific types of interference or line attenuation exist Refer to the ITU T G 992 1 recommendation for more information on DMT The better or shorter the line the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15 DS carrier load displays the number of bits transmitted per DMT tone for the downstream channel from the network module to the subscriber s DSL modem or router US carrier l
24. The status command displays whether or not the DHCP relay feature is activated 29 2 9 Trace Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt trace The trace command activates trace option s 29 2 10 Untrace Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt untrace The untrace command deactivates trace option s 29 2 11 Version Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt version The version command displays the DHCP software version 29 3 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option Use the following commands to configure the DHCP relay agent information option feature 29 3 1 Relayinfo Enable Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt relayinfo enable The relayinfo enable command turns on the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 feature 29 3 2 Relayinfo Disable Command Syntax DHCP Relay Commands 29 3 IES 1000 User s Guide 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt relayinfo disable The relayinfo disable command turns off the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 feature 29 3 3 Relayinfo Status Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt relayinfo status The relayinfo status command displays the current status of the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 feature 29 3 4 Relayinfo Add Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt relayinfo add lt info gt where lt info gt Up to 24 ASCII characters of additional information for the Integrated Ethernet Switch to add to the DHCP client TCP IP co
25. Use monitor without any port numbers to display line information for every port This command is also equal to the show chs command see section 26 3 5 Show Channels Command 25 3 22 Set Central Side N wire Mode Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set nwirec lt mode gt lt group name gt lt group gt where lt mode gt Type 4w to physically bundle together two ports into an N wire group Type 8w to physically bundle together four ports into an N wire group You can bundle multiple groups of ports as long as they do not overlap lt group name gt The name of the n wire bundling group up to 31 characters lt group gt Specify which ports are to be members of this bundled n wire group With a 4 wire group type 4 for ports 7 and 8 3 for ports 5 and 6 2 for ports 3 and 4 or 1 for ports 1 and 2 You must configure 4 wire group 4 before group 3 and group 2 before group 1 Although you can configure groups 2 and before configuring groups 4 and 3 it is recommended that you configure 4 wire groups from higher numbers to lower numbers and delete them from lower numbers to higher numbers With an 8 wire group type 2 for ports 5 to 8 or 1 for ports 1 to 4 This command bundles the specified ports into an n wire group for the STU C SHDSL Termination Unit Central One SAM1008 must be set to be the central side and the other must be set to be the remote side Configure both
26. and that all devices are turned on Make sure the SAM1008 SHDSL port is enabled refer to the web configurator edit port setup screens The SHDSL ports are disabled by default Check the SHDSL line pin assignments shown in the Pin Assignments appendix Check the telephone wire connections between the G SHDSL modem router and the MDF s Check the telephone wire and connections between the MDF s and ADSL port s Check the telephone wire mapping on the MDF s Make sure the in house wiring works and is connected properly COIN OD oO AJIO Make sure the line speed is consistent between the IES 1000 side and the CPE Customer Premise Equipment side If your line quality is low you may need to select a slower line speed for both the IES 1000 and CPE sides Refer to the User s Guide 10 Repeat the steps above using a different SHDSL port 8 4 The ADSL LED s Do Not Turn On The ADSL LEDs show the operational status of ADSL port connections If the ADSL LED is off it means the link to the ADSL modem router is down or there is not a connection to the ADSL port Table 8 4 ADSL LED Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION Ensure that all hardware connections are correctly installed including the modem router on the subscriber s side and that all devices are turned on Make sure the AAM1008 ADSL port is enabled refer to the User s Guide or Quick Start Guide The
27. lt community gt lt IP addr gt where lt community gt The password used by the network module to authenticate itself to the trap server lt IP addr gt The IP address of the trap server This command adds a trap server 34 2 Remote Management IES 1000 User s Guide 34 4 2 Trap Delete Command Syntax trap delete lt community gt lt IP addr gt This command deletes a trap destination The parameters are the same as the trap add command 34 43 Trap Flush Command Syntax trap flush This command deletes all trap destinations 34 44 Trap List Command Syntax trap list This command lists all the trap destinations Remote Management 34 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 35 Configuration Backup Restore This chapter describes the process for backing up your user settings configuration from the network module onto your computer and how to restore them to the network module The network modules use FTP for configuration backup restore through their built in FTP servers You can use any FTP client for example ftp exe in Windows to backup restore the network module s configuration 35 1 Configuration Files of the Network Module The network module uses configuration files to store the user s settings so they can be applied the next time the network module is booted The network module has the following configuration file init The system configuration file for the network module
28. port 11 4 ADSL Module Port Setup IES 1000 User s Guide 11 8 1 ADSL Profile Setup Screen A profile is a list of settings that you define Then you can assign them to one or more individual ports Click the Profile Setup link in the Port Setup screen to go to the Profile Setup screen ADSL Profile Setup Latency Profile Name Mode Up Stream Rate Kbps interleave 512 fast 1024 4096 Add Delete Down Stream Rate Delete Kbps 2048 Figure 11 2 ADSL Profile Setup Table 11 3 ADSL Profile Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Setup Click this link to go to the Port Setup screen Profile Name These are the names of individual profiles The DEFVAL profile always exists and all of the DSL edit the profile ports have it assigned to them by default Click a profile s name to go to a screen where you can Latency Mode This is the ADSL latency mode fast or interleave for the ports that use this profile Upstream Max Rate Kbps 1024 kilobits per second Kbps are supported This is the maximum upstream transfer rate for the ports that use this profile Soeeds from 32 to Downstream Max This is the maximum downstream transfer rate for the ports that use this profile Soeeds from 32 Rate Kbps to 8160 Kbps are supported Add Click this button to configure a new profile Delete Select a profile s Delete check box and click the Delete button to remove the profile
29. yields version show system software version The system responds with a description of the version command 22 3 2 Saving Your Configuration Always remember to save your configuration using the following syntax 192 168 1 1 gt config save This command saves all system configurations into nonvolatile memory You must use this command to save any configurations that you make otherwise the IES 1000 will return to its default settings when it is restarted Do not turn off your IES 1000 while saving your configuration 22 4 Commands The following table lists all of the commands that you can use with the IES 1000 Refer to the following chapters for descriptions of commonly used commands This user s guide describes commands that are helpful for configuring the IES 1000 Using commands not documented in the user s guide can damage the unit and possibly render it unusable 22 2 Commands Introduction IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION bridge config Save Saves the bridge s run time configuration to nonvolatile memory print Shows the bridge s run time configuration reset Reloads the bridge s run time configuration from nonvolatile memory device Shows the bridge settings add lt edd xport 1 8 gt Adds a bridge device delete lt edd xport 1 8 gt Deletes a bridge device list Displays the b
30. 0 4 o 33 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 Poll Interval s 40 Set Interval Stop Start Port 1 Stop Port 8 Set Range Clear Figure 19 4 Channel Statistics 19 4 Statistics IES 1000 User s Guide Table 19 4 Channel Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION System This field shows how long the system has been running since the last time it was started Uptime Port This refers to the DSL port number VPI This field displays the channel s Virtual Path Identifier VPI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on a port VCI This field displays the channel s Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on a port TxPkts This field shows the number of packets transmitted by this port on this individual channel since the network module last restarted or the statistics were last cleared RxPkts This field shows the number of packets received by this port on this individual channel since the network module last restarted or the statistics were last cleared Tx B s This field shows the number of bytes transmitted on a per second basis by this port on this individual channel Rx B s This field shows the number of bytes received on a per second basis by this port on this individual channel Tx Cells This field shows the number of ATM cells transmitted by this port on this individual channel Rx Ce
31. 1000 User s Guide G lite ITU T G 992 2 G hs ITU T G 994 1 ANSI T1 413 issue 2 ETSI TS 101 388 e Rate adaptation support N wire Mode SAM1008 The n wire mode allows you to physically bundle two or four G SHDSL ports into a single 4 wire or 8 wire G SHDSL connection This can increase the reach of G SHDSL or give increased bandwidth when connecting to 4 wire mode G SHDSL modems or another IES 1000 Given the same number of ports n wire mode provides better throughput than 2 wire port port bonding Port Bonding SAM1008 The port bonding feature allows you to combine two to eight G SHDSL connections between two IES 1000s into a single logical connection You can combine individual ports or n wire bundled groups This can give increased bandwidth for LAN to LAN applications Bridging e IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging e Upto 4096 MAC entries address table e Port based VLAN Virtual Local Area Network IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Your IES 1000 uses the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Virtual Local Area Network which allows your device to deliver tagged untagged frames to and from its ports The IES 1000 supports up to 400 VLANs and up to 4094 VLAN IDs IEEE 802 1p Priority Your IES 1000 uses IEEE 802 1p Priority to assign priority levels to individual ports Fast Mode The fast mode makes use of the tag subset of the IEEE 802 1Q standard to identify the source port of a frame and speed traffic through a service g
32. 11 St tie Route Setup yrrir eana SRE E EREE id died ta 14 1 Figure 14 2 AGO Static ROQUE da 14 2 Figure 15 1 Static VLAN SetUpiciiri ariii e eed eed dl ed ed lee ec 15 4 Figure 15 2 Add VEAN Static ENYA den eae a ae eae 15 5 Figure 16 1 SNMP Management Model cccecceceeeeeeeee scence ee conocio nono no cnn nano cnn arrancar 16 1 Figure TGZ SNMP S tup unta ead 16 3 Figure 16 3Add SNMP Access Entry e isi04 fs ssscecevsscdcefastsheeadascdabeeevatad cats suaheesssadodepasdabesevadadate O A AEA 16 4 Elgure t t BOGUS sai te ttt o ence ah gene AG a lili dodo teases ataneatian 17 1 Figure 18 1 Maintenance icono ek ad ce ed el ed ee leeds 18 1 Figure 18 2 Secured Client SOtUp iii titi eii EEAS 18 2 Figure 1 3 3 Add Secured Clint at td dai 18 3 Figure 18 4 Firmware WpQrade vis cocsvccsccngstecaaeetncsceedesuchcueds od lla dad dada pi 18 5 Figure 18 5 Restore Configuration ooononccccnnnnncccnnnoncccnnnoncccnn nor cc cnn nn crac 18 5 Figure 18 6 Backup ConfiguratiON oononcccnnnnncccnnnnoccccnnnoncconnnorccnnn non cnn narrar rre 18 6 Figure 19 1 Statistics ti A ts 19 1 Figure 192 Hardware Man dad 19 2 Figure 19 3 Port StatistICS cir tl di tado das 19 3 Figure 194 Chamel Statistics tico ia 19 4 Figure 19 59 LAN Status ss22 cicdecais loteo ta dan dead ceabde a stant eeadae dee adace bd AA tect ahha cGseies faadet ead waneies 19 6 Figure 20 1 DIAGNOSIS ee E a 20 1 Figure 20 2 DSL LNE Diagnose nae Ta E E E EREE 20 5
33. 13 5 DSL Port VC Profile Add Table 13 3 DSL Port VC Profile Add LABEL DESCRIPTION VC Profile Setup Click this link to go to the VC Profile Setup screen Profile Name When editing a profile this is the name of this profile When adding a profile type a name for the profile Encap Select the encapsulation type LLC or VC for this port AAL Select the ATM Adaptation Layer 0 3 4 or 5 13 8 Virtual Channel Management IES 1000 User s Guide Table 13 3 DSL Port VC Profile Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Class Select cbr constant bit rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select ubr unspecified bit rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select rt vbr real time variable bit rate or nrt vbr non real time variable bit rate for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications Select abr available bit rate for file transfers and other bursty non real time traffic PCR Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells PCR applies with all of the ATM traffic classes Type the PCR here CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT is the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT applies with all of the ATM traffic classes Type the CDVT here
34. 192 168 1 1 adsl gt delete ch 8 0 33 26 3 3 Delete Channels Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt delete chs lt start port gt lt stop port gt where lt start port gt The first port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information 1 is used if you leave this blank lt stop port gt The last port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information 8 is used if you leave this blank The delete chs command deletes all PVC channels for the specified ports The following example deletes the PVC channels for ports 5 to 8 192 168 1 1 adsl gt delete chs 5 8 26 3 4 Show Channel Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 or means all 8 ports lt vpi gt The VPI setting 0 to 255 lt vci gt The VCI setting 32 to 65535 if vpi 0 or 1 to 65535 if the vpi does not 0 The show ch command displays the contents of the specified PVC channel The following example displays the contents of the PVC channel for port 8 that uses VPI 0 and VCI 33 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show ch 8 0 33 PVID PRIORITY VC profile name ENABLE Figure 26 3 Chow Channel Command Example Virtual Channel Management 26 5 IES 1000 User s Guide 26 3 5 Show Channels Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ads1 gt show chs lt start port gt lt stop port gt where lt start port gt The firs
35. 2 Show VCPs Command Example ooococicococcconcococcnonononcnnnnnnncnn nn n ocn nnonn ocn n ran rE ERREKA nn MKATE EREC A ERATKAN rra 26 3 Figure 26 3 Chow Channel Command Example ooococococonococonnnococcnonononcnnnnnoncnnnnno nc nar nnnn tuunattu ESAE nn nn rn rra rra 26 5 Figure 26 4 Chow Channel Command Example oooococccnnoccccononccccnnonnoncnnnnnoncnnnnno nc nano o nn n rro nn r nn rra r rmac rr n rra 26 6 Figure 26 5 Channel Statistics Command ExaMple ooocoonnncccccnnococcnonononcnnnono testit tssk truant nn nr nano ESAE nn rar Anat rra rnnn rra 26 8 Figure 26 6 Channel Statistics Command ExaMple oooooncccconnococcnonononcnnnnnonanonono canon nono nn nr nano nn aran nn rr nnnn rara 26 9 Figure 28 1 Mfilter Command Example orraa rn EAA nc nr anno cnn nano nn aran rra rr anna EAA 28 3 Figure 28 2 Portfilter Command Example sieri NEARE Ea AT r nn nr nr nn rra rra rra 28 5 Figure 28 3 Portfilter Command Example 2 0oococconnocccconnococnnoonononcnonono cnn nono cnn nro rca r anna nn errar rre 28 6 Figure 28 4 Example of Modified Port Filter Port 2 00ooooo cocoonncocccnnococannnncannnnnoncannn nono EAA 28 6 Figure 28 5 Example of Modified Port Filter Port B ooooo noconnnnniccnononocannnonananononc cnn nnnn nc nr nnnn cnn nano nn rr rn nnrrrnnrrrnn 28 7 Figure 28 6 Example of Modified Port Filter Settings o oooonnnncnnnnicicinnnnncoccnnnnconnnonononcnrnnno nn nr nnno nn rro rn rrnnn nin 28 7 Elgure 29 1 Pool Gommand Example ccoo rre aro tid
36. 50000 100 26 2 2 Delete VCP Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt delete vcp lt profile name gt where lt profile name gt The name of the virtual channel profile up to 31 ASCII characters You cannot delete the DEFVAL profile The delete vcp command deletes the specified virtual channel profile You cannot delete a virtual channel profile that is assigned to any of the network module s DSL channels Assign a different profile to any DSL channels that are using the profile that you want to delete and then you can delete the profile The following example deletes the silver virtual channel profile 192 168 1 1 adsl gt delete vcp silver 26 2 Virtual Channel Management IES 1000 User s Guide 26 2 3 Delete VCPs Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt delete vcps The delete vcps command deletes all of the virtual channel profiles except the DEFVAL profile You cannot delete a virtual channel profile that is assigned to any of the network module s DSL channels Assign a different profile to any DSL channels that are using the profile that you want to delete and then you can delete the profile 26 2 4 Show VCP Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show vcp lt profile name gt where lt profile name gt The name of the virtual channel profile up to 31 ASCII characters Displays the contents of the specified virtual channel profile The following example displays the virtual channel profile named gold
37. 70 C e Humidity 5 95 Hardware Specifications IES 1000 User s Guide 2 Philips Screwdriver 10 Mbps Ethernet 10 100M Auto Sensing Ethernet 100 Mbps Ethernet 4 4 wire 8 802 1x Edit Screen 8 wire A AAL AAM1008 Connections ABR AC INPUT Access Delete Command Access Flush Command Access List Command Actual Rate Actual Speed ADSL Over ISDN Over POTS ADSL Compliance ADSL Configuration ADSL Connections ADSL MDF Connections 4 1 7 2 11 7 7 2 12 1 10 20 12 1 13 7 6 5 13 4 13 7 6 12 34 2 34 2 34 2 11 2 24 1 25 1 xxi 24 13 xxi 24 13 xxi 24 13 1 1 24 1 6 5 ADSL Module Port Setup ADSL Overview ADSL Port ADSL Ports AAM1008 ADSL Profile Add or Edit ADSL Profile Setup ADSL Standards Aggregates Traffic Airflow ALM American Wire Gauge Annex A Annex B Applications ATM Traffic Classes Auto Auto negotiation Available Bit Rate AWG BOOTP TFTP Bridge Commands Bridge Port Numbers Bridge Setup Bridging BT Burst Tolerance Index 11 3 24 1 8 2 2 2 11 6 11 5 11 2 1 4 6 12 7 2 8 1 H xxi 24 5 24 13 xxi 24 13 1 4 13 3 24 12 24 13 8 3 13 4 13 7 H 36 2 28 1 28 1 10 2 1 2 13 6 13 7 13 6 13 7 Index IES 1000 User s Guide C Console Port 2 1 CBR 13 3 13 7 Console Port Connection 6 2 CDVT 13 5 13 7 Constant Bit Rate 13 3 13 7 CE Mark Warning iii Contact Person s Name 10 1 Cell Delay Var
38. AAA AAA 20 1 Table 20 2 L0g Format A et eee atar 20 2 Table 20 3 L0g Messages ii 20 2 Table 20 4 DSL Line Diagnostic dde coda 20 5 Table 21 1 Troubleshooting the DSL LED S ooccnnnnnncccnnnaciccnnnanccinononrn cinco noc cnn nar ncn rra rca rr 21 1 Table 21 2 Troubleshooting Data Transmission onocccnnnnccnnnnancccnnnonccnnnn corn cn nro rn carne 21 1 Table 21 3 Troubleshooting a Non Constant DSL LED occnnnnncccnnnncccccnnnoncccnn noc ccnn noc cnn nar cnn nc rn 21 2 Table 21 4 Troubleshooting the SYNC rate occccnnnnccccnnnoccccnnnoncccnnnonc cono nan nn cnn nn c cnn nr rca 21 2 Table 21 5 Troubleshooting the Network Module s Configured Settings o ooocinnnniinnnnnnnccnnnococconncccccnnnrrccnnnnnnnns 21 2 Table 21 6 Troubleshooting the Password c ooooonccccnnnccccnnnoccccnnnoncccnnn non cnn nn ttak cnn rca rr 21 2 Table 21 7 Troubleshooting a Local Server onnconnnnniccnnnnacoconnnoncccnn corn aen c cnn E rca rr rr 21 3 Table 21 8 Troubleshooting the SNMP Server oocnnnccccnnocccccnnoncccnnnoncconnnnn nn cnn nan rc cnn rr 21 3 Table 21 9 Troubleshooting Telnet iii traia 21 3 Table 221 COMMANGS rd odie 22 3 Table 23 1 Logs Sent to Your UNIX Servet oocccconnoccccnnnocccccnnonccnnonononcnnnnn nc cnn nan AE rra 23 5 Table 24 1 Lineinfo Command seeiis isai rn rr AAEE EERS 24 5 Table 24 2 Line Performance Counters drii peecgea tea stecittaagicets orina OEN EA SA ERANA 24 7 Table 28 1 Physical Ports Port Numbers and IES 1000 Default PVID
39. Channel Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt clear ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 or means all 8 ports lt vpi gt The VPI setting 0 to 255 lt vci gt The VCI setting 32 to 65535 if vpi 0 or 1 to 65535 if the vpi does not 0 The clear ch command erases the statistics of the specified PVC channel The following example erases the statistics for the PVC channel for port 8 that uses VPI 0 and VCI 33 192 168 1 1 adsl gt clear ch 8 0 33 26 3 13 Clear Channels Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt clear chs lt start port gt lt stop port gt where lt start port gt The first port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information 1 is used if you leave this blank lt stop port gt The last port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information 8 is used if you leave this blank The clear chs command erases the statistics of the PVC channels for the specified ports The following example erases the statistics for the PVC channels for ports 5 to 8 192 168 1 1 adsl gt clear chs 5 8 Virtual Channel Management 26 9 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 27 10 100M Fast Ethernet Port Commands The Ethernet subsystem allows you to configure and monitor the 10 100M fast Ethernet port 27 1 10 100M Fast Ethernet Overview Refer to the web configurator chapter on the ADSL module ports for background
40. Command 28 2 Line Performance Counters 24 6 25 3 Management 1 3 Line Rate Parameters 24 7 Management Information Base MIB 16 2 Linedata Command 24 3 Margins 24 8 Lineinfo Command 24 4 25 3 Max Rate Kbps 12 7 Lineperf Command 24 6 25 3 Max SNR db 11 7 Linerate Command 24 7 Maximum Attainable Rate 24 8 List Bonded Members Command 25 16 Maximum Burst Size 13 5 List N wire Groups Command 25 15 MBS 13 5 List of Figures xiii MCR 13 4 13 5 13 7 List of Tables xviii MDF Main Distribution Frame 6 2 6 4 6 5 List Port Command 24 8 25 4 MDF Blocks 6 5 List Ports Command 24 9 25 5 Member List 12 5 List Profiles Command 24 11 25 6 Mfilter Command 28 3 LLC Bridge 13 1 Min Rate Kbps 12 7 Location 10 1 Min SNR db 11 7 Log Format 20 2 Minimum Cell Rate 13 4 13 5 13 7 Log Messages 20 2 Mounting Brackets 4 2 4 3 M MTU 1 4 M3 Flat Head Screws 4 1 MTU Application 1 4 M5 Flat Head Screws 4 1 Multiplexer 1 1 MAC Media Access Control Filter 1 2 N MAC filter Naming Conventions xxi Default 2 2 Navigating the Web Configurator 9 4 Disable 28 2 Navigation Panel Links 9 2 Enable 28 2 Netscape Navigator 6 9 1 Status 28 2 Network Interface Card 3 1 Index M IES 1000 User s Guide Network Modules 1 1 Port Filter 10 5 NIC See Network Interface Card Port Period Command 30 3 Non real time Variable Bit Rate 13 4 13 7 Port Re authentication Command 30 3 NRM 13 4 13 7 Port Setup 11 1 12 1 nrt VBR 13 7 Port Status Command 30 3 nrt VBR 13 4 Por
41. FEC Redundancy per Reed Parity byte assigned to fast interleaved Solomon codeword that are assigned to the fast or interleaved buffer Upstream Parity byte assigned to fast interleaved This is the current number of upstream parity bytes FEC Redundancy per Reed Solomon codeword that are assigned to the fast or interleaved buffer Downstream Symbols assigned to fast interleaved This is the current number of downstream symbols per Reed Solomon codeword value that are assigned to the fast or interleaved buffer This should always be 1 for fast mode Upstream Symbols assigned to fast interleaved This is the current number of upstream symbols per Reed Solomon codeword value that are assigned to the fast or interleaved buffer This should always be 1 for fast mode At the time of writing the AAM1008 always uses Trellis coding ADSL Commands 24 5 IES 1000 User s Guide Down up stream Depth value This is the current downstream or upstream interleaved codeword depth value The larger the number the more interleave blocks data is distributed across and the stronger the protection against errors and the lower the performance is The smaller the number the fewer interleave blocks data is distributed across and the higher the performance and the weaker the protection against errors Total Transceiver Output Power The total output power of the transceiver varies with th
42. IES 1000 from your computer If you are able to ping the IES 1000 but are still unable to telnet contact the distributor If you cannot ping check the cable connections and IP configuration 4 If you are attempting to telnet from a DSL port refer to section 21 2 to make sure that you can transmit data to the DSL port Troubleshooting 21 3 Commands Part V Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 22 Commands Introduction This section introduces the command line interface and lists the available commands 22 1 Command Line Interface Overview In addition to the web configurator you can use commands to configure the IES 1000 It is recommended that you use the web configurator for everyday management of the IES 1000 and that you use commands for advanced switch diagnosis and troubleshooting If you have problems with your IES 1000 customer support may request that you issue some of these commands to assist them in troubleshooting Telnet to the switch or connect a computer to the console port and use terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control 22 2 Command Structure The system uses a two level command structure The commands related to one subsystem are grouped under a primary command of that subsystem for instance to configure the Ethernet parameters you must first en
43. LABEL DESCRIPTION Maintenance Click this link to go to the Maintenance screen Maintenance 18 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 18 3 Add Secured Client LABEL DESCRIPTION Secured Click this link to go to the Secured Client Setup screen Client Setup Secured Set the IP address of a computer that you want to allow Telnet FTP or Web access to this IES Client 1000 Address e t If you enter an IP address in this field the IES 1000 checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service matches the value here The IES 1000 immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link in the navigation panel on the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this page afresh 18 2 2 Firmware Upgrade Screen Click Maintenance in the navigation panel and then Firmware Upgrade in the Maintenance screen Use the Firmware Upgrade screen to upgrade the network module s firmware Do not interrupt the upgrade process as it may permanently damage the network module The IES 1000 automatically restarts when the upgrade process is complete Procedure to upgrade your firmware Step 1 Use the network module s Statistics sc
44. LABEL DESCRIPTION State This field shows whether a port is turned on enable or off disable TxPkts This field shows the number of frames transmitted by this port since the network module last restarted or the statistics were last manually cleared via command RxPkts This field shows the number of frames received by this port since the network module last restarted or the statistics were last manually cleared via command Errors This field shows the number of transmitted and received errors on this port Tx B s This field shows the number of bytes transmitted on a per second basis by this port Rx B s This field shows the number of bytes received on a per second basis by this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the line has been up Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling on the IES 1000 19 2 3 Channel Statistics Screen Click Statistics in the navigation panel and then Channel Statistics in the Statistics screen to open this screen Use this screen to check status and performance data about the channels on this DSL module s ports System up Time 000 07 32 11 Port VPI VCI DPks RxPkts Tx Bis Rx Bis Tx Calls Rx Calls 1 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 33 0 0 D 0 0
45. PSD Region AnnexB f Min Rate 192 Kbps Max Rate 192 Kbps Apply Reset Figure 12 4 G SHDSL Add Profile Table 12 4 G SHDSL Add Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Setup Click this link to go to the Port Setup screen Profile Name When editing a profile this is the name of this profile When adding a profile type a name for the profile PSD Region Select the Power Spectral Density PSD region for this profile Annex A for North America or Annex B for Europe Min Rate Kbps Select a minimum speed from 192K to 2304K Do not configure a minimum speed greater than the maximum speed Max Rate Kbps Select a maximum speed from 192K to 2304K Do not configure a maximum speed less than the minimum speed Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 12 8 2 Ethernet Port Setup Screen Ethernet Port Setup in the SAM1008 module is the same as in the AAM1008 module see section 11 9 12 8 3 G SHDSL Port Setup Screen Click a G SHDSL port in the Port Setup screen to open this screen G SHDSL Module Port Setup 12 7 IES 1000 User s Guide Edit Port Setup Port Numbe
46. STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Connect the DSL modem or router directly to the DSL port of the IES 1000 using a different telephone wire 2 If the rates match the quality of the telephone wiring that connects the subscriber to the IES 1000 may be limiting the speed to a certain rate If they do not match when a good wire is used contact the distributor 21 5 Port Bonding Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in the part on commands 21 6 Configured Settings The IES 1000 s configured settings do not take effect Table 21 5 Troubleshooting the Network Module s Configured Settings CORRECTIVE ACTION Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring If this does not work contact the distributor 21 7 Password I forgot the password to my IES 1000 Table 21 6 Troubleshooting the Password CORRECTIVE ACTION See the chapter on firmware upload and recovery in the Commands part 21 2 Troubleshooting IES 1000 User s Guide 21 8 Local Server The computer behind a DSL modem or router cannot access a local server connected to the IES 1000 Table 21 7 Troubleshooting a Local Server STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION Refer to section 21 2
47. Sr ad vin did 10 22 Chapter 11 ADSL Module Port Setup a A eee Re ee ee 11 1 11 1 ADSL Module Port Setup Overview ccccccccccessecssecsecsecsecesecesecsecseeceeseceseeeseeeseessaecsaeenseseeenaeengs 11 1 T12 gt ADSL Standards Overview isisisi A diosa 11 1 11 3 Doywnstreamiand Upstream ereer rea i beac e ohad cant vacebvee chet denna bel EE 11 1 O O O ON 11 1 11 5 A AI NS 11 2 11 6 ADSL Configured Versus Actual Rate ccceccccccccsssessseesceessecsecssecesecesecesecseeeseeeessecsaecaecnseceaeenseengs 11 2 11 7 ADSL Module Default Settings 2 0 0 ccc cccccsecscecsseeseecssecesecesecnseesecseeeeeseceeeeeseeeseecsaecaecnsesetensaeenes 11 2 11 8 ADSL Module Port Setup Screen cccccccecsseessecsseessecseecesecesecesecssecseeceeseceseeeseeeseecaecaecnseseaeenseenas 11 3 11 9 10 100M Auto Sensing Ethernet cccccccecccccssessseessecssecsseensecesecesecseeseeeeeseseneeeseeeseecsaenseeeeeesereseaeenes 11 7 Chapter12 GSHDSL Module Port Setup cccccecceeccececeeeeeceeaeeeeceeeeeeeseeaaeceeeeeeeseceneaeeeeeeeeesessensaaeeeeeees 12 1 12 1 G SHDSL Module Port Setup Overview oc cccccccccssecssecsseceecesecsecseeeeseeesaecseecssecnseceseenseeeeeeseeeseeeeags 12 1 12 22 G SHDSL Standards Overview ececcceseescesecsseeseesececeeseeseceaesaeeeceaecaeeeneaecaceeceeseceaeeaesecaecaeeeeeeaeeate 12 1 1273 Ve SHDSL POES A e A O id tah occ AO 12 1 12 4 Novi Mode A A iS 12 1 125 Port RR 12 2 12 6 N wire Mode with Port Bonding Exampl
48. Static Entry SNMP SNMP Access Entry Add Logins Maintenance Secured Client Setup Firmware Upgrade Restore Configuration Backup Configuration Statistics Hardware Monitor Port Statistics Channel Statistics VLAN Status Diagnostic Web Configurator Access and Navigation 9 3 IES 1000 User s Guide 9 5 Saving Your Configuration Click Apply in a configuration screen to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power Click Config Save on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring 9 6 Navigating the Web Configurator The web configurator uses multiple levels Some features only require you to use one level For example to configure General Setup click the link on the navigation panel to open the configuration screen Some features use more levels 9 6 1 Web Configurator Navigation Example Bridge Setup has screens that allow you to configure bridging and filtering features For example click Bridge Setup in the navigation panel to go to the general Bridge Setup screen shown next Bridge Setup Operating Mode Bridge Mode Normal Apply Normal Mode Setting Fast Mode Setting t Mod AN Figure 9 3 Bridge Setup Example 9 4 Web Configurator Access and Navigation IES 1000 User s Guide Click the Packet Type Filter to go down
49. Static VLAN Setup page Name Type a name to identify the VLAN Port Number This field displays the port number Normal Select Normal registration for the associated port if you want that port to join this VLAN group using GVRP Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent members of this VLAN group Forbidden Select forbidden for a port to block that port from joining this VLAN group Tx Tagging Select Tx Tagging for the associated port if you want that port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted Only select this if the subscriber s DSL modem or router supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this page afresh 15 6 VLAN IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 16 SNMP This chapter explains how to configure Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 16 1 SNMP Management SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices The IES 1000 supports SNMP versions one and two SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor it through the network The next figure illustrates an SNMP management opera
50. Status Command 27 2 28 1 Set Remote Side N wire Mode Command 25 11 Straight through Category 5 UTP Unshielded Set Remote Side Port Bonding Command 25 13 Twisted Pair Cable 6 12 8 3 Set Slot Command 23 3 STU 12 5 Set Speed Command 27 1 STU C 12 5 12 10 12 11 25 10 25 11 25 12 Set VCP Command 26 1 STU R 12 5 12 10 12 11 25 13 Setting IP Address 33 1 Subnet Add Command 33 3 Shared Secret 10 20 Subnet Delete Command 33 3 SHDSL 6 2 6 3 6 4 7 2 Subnet Flush Command 33 3 SHDSL Port 6 2 8 2 8 3 Super Channel 13 1 13 10 SHDSL Port s 6 2 Supported Traps 16 2 Show Channel Command 26 5 Sustained Cell Rate 13 5 13 7 Show Channels Command 26 6 SVLAN CPU Command 31 4 Show Port Command 24 13 SVLAN Delentry Command 31 8 Show Ports Command 24 14 SVLAN Getentry Command 31 8 Show Profile Command 24 11 25 7 SVLAN List Command 31 4 Show Profiles Command 24 12 25 7 SVLAN Setentry Command 31 5 Show PVC Command 24 15 25 9 SVLAN Table 15 2 Show PVCs command 24 15 SYS 7 1 7 2 8 1 Show PVCs Command 25 9 Sys Commands 23 2 Show VCP Command 26 3 Sys Errlog 23 6 Show VCPs Command 26 3 Clear Log 23 6 SHOWTIME 24 8 Logs 23 6 SNMP 16 1 16 2 34 1 34 2 Sys Error Log Get 16 2 Default 2 2 Manager 16 1 S19 LED 8 1 SNMP Community Strings 2 1 Syslog Command 23 5 SNR db 44 7 Syslog Facility Command 23 5 p Index IES 1000 User s Guide Syslog Server Command 23 5 Default 2 2 System Commands 23 1 Enable Disable Logs 23 5 System Error Log Commands 2
51. Tags in Fast Mode 28 8 Table 37 1 Troubleshooting the DSL LED S cee iter tr ir ee eee eee rete naar nncr naar nrc naar nr nc aannaaien 37 1 Table 37 2 Troubleshooting Data Transmission 0 cc ccccceeeee tierce erent ee ee eine ee estate ee teee unnat nc nn nan nnnn nan nnnc naar nncninns 37 1 Table 37 3 Troubleshooting a Non Constant DSL LED eee tere entre etter erties conan cnn naar nn cn nana nc nannncnnnnns 37 2 Table 37 4 Troubleshooting the SYNC ratte oo cee cere ieee ee eee ete nc nano nn ee ee nn nn nn naar nn rr naar nrnn naar nnccnnns 37 2 Table 37 5 Troubleshooting Port Bonding enirir a Eaa SE E E E EEOAE AS 37 2 Table 37 6 Troubleshooting the Network Module s Configured Settings ooooonnncccnnnnnccccnnnancccnononcccnnnancncnnnan cnc 37 3 Table 37 7 Troubleshooting the Password ooooccconoccccnnnocccccononcncnonnnnncnnnnn nc nc canon cnnnn nn nn rc naar nn rn naar nn cnc naar nn cnn nn nn aandaa aaan E aa 37 4 Table 37 8 Troubleshooting a Local SelVer ccocnncccccnnnoccconononcccnnnonc cono nono cn nn nr cn anar 37 4 Table 37 9 Troubleshooting SNMP oonnccccnnoccccnononcconononcconnn nn ncnn nar n cnn narrar rrnrrrn 37 4 Table 37 10 Troubleshooting Telnet crin artes cities tada 37 4 List of Tables xxi IES 1000 User s Guide Preface Congratulations on your purchase of the IES 1000 Integrated Ethernet Switch About this User s Manual This user s guide explains how to gt Install the IES 100
52. Tai 21 3 O E PE TN 21 3 Commands EAE a Aa uacevsyeupsucedess eine V Chapter 22 Commands Introduction ooooononccocncnnnnnccinnnononncnncnnnnnnnonnnncnnnnnnn anno nnnnnnnnnn anar nnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnn s 22 1 22 1 Command Line Interface Overview 20 ececeecceseesesseeescesecseescessecaeeeaeseceaecaeseeceaecaeeeneeaecaaeeaeeaeesenaeees 22 1 22 2 Command Structure sienien aee seach Aa e iaa a AR a E a a E a E E AAEE ARES 22 1 22 3 Command Syntax Conventions cccccecssessceescecsecsseceseceseceseceseeseecseeeseeeeeseceseeeseecsaecsaecaecnseeeseesaeenas 22 1 ZA Commands a 22 2 Chapter 23 System COMMANS reirei scotland ida dd dada 23 1 23 1 System Commands Overview cccccccecsseesseesceesceececssecesecnsecesecesecseeseeeseaeeeseeeaeecseecsaecsaecsaeceaeenseeeaeeaes 23 1 23 2 Commonly Used Commands cccceccsecsseesseesceeseceaecsecesecnsecssecsecseeeeeseceseeeseecseecsaecsaecaecesecnseenaeenas 23 1 233 SYS COMME A AEE REA aldo 23 2 23 4 Secured SAA as a a A a e a E aa e A aiat 23 4 23 5 UNIX Syslog Commands A ai 23 5 23 67 System Error Eog COMME ii 23 6 Chapter 24 ADSL CommandSi r geass eia ea a a a a a aada T aaa aaa aadi T A 24 1 DAR 1 ADS OVA dd E E E n th meniaean 24 1 24 2 Configured Versus Actual Rate oooooonccnnncninnnnnonnocnnonnconnooncconncon cono E P TE D aA i isapa 24 1 243 ADSE Commands A A a a i 24 1 Chapt r 25 G SHDSE Commands sanes renean ede eaea aaea Ee ea Ee datan db 25 1 A ASS ISI A
53. The set vcp command creates a virtual channel profile The following example creates a virtual channel profile named gold that uses LLC encapsulation and AAL 5 It uses constant bit rate and has the maximum rate peak cell rate set to 300 000 cells per second The acceptable tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT is set to 5 cells 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set vcp gold llc aal5 cbr 300000 5 The following example creates a virtual channel profile named silver that uses VC encapsulation and AAL 5 It uses real time variable bit rate and has the maximum rate peak cell rate set to 3000 000 cells per second The acceptable tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT is set to 5 cells The average cell rate that can be transmitted SCR is set to 250 000 cells per second The maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards BT is set to 200 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set vcp silver ve aal5 rt vbr 300000 5 250000 200 The following example creates a virtual channel profile named economy that uses LLC encapsulation and AAL 5 It uses unspecified bit rate and has the maximum rate peak cell rate set to 50 000 cells per second The acceptable tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT is set to 100 cells 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set vcp economy llc aal5 ubr
54. This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Address IES 1000 that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Add Click this button to configure a new static route Delete Select a static route s s Delete check box and click the Delete button to remove the static route Static Route 14 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 14 2 1 Add Static Route Screen Click Static Route Setup in the navigation panel to open the Static Route screen and then click Add to open this screen Use this menu to configure a static route Static Route Entry Add Static Route Entry Entry Name Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric 15 Apply Reset Figure 14 2 Add Static Route The following table describes this screen Table 14 2 Add Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Static Route Click this link to go to the Static Route Setup page Setup Entry Name Enter a descriptive name for the static route maximum 27 alphanumeric characters This is for identification purposes only Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always Address based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask
55. Troubleshooting 8 3 IES 1000 User s Guide tests to be done Suppose you re using installation scenario B as shown in the chapter on MDF connections The logic for other scenarios should be similar Use steps A D if there is no voice but you can transmit data Use all of the steps if there is no voice and you cannot transmit data A Test A determines if there is a wiring problem between the TELCO telephone company and MDF 1 Test B determines if there is a wiring problem between MDF 1 and MDF 2 Test C determines if there is a wiring problem between MDF 2 and your device Test D determines if there is a problem with your device s internal splitter Test E determines if there is a wiring problem between your device and MDF 3 nn mM uo y Test F determines if there is a te problem between the subscriber s wall jack and MDF 3 5 ADSL 4 USER ASAS To Ce SL SE OG OU OF K OF co ra 9 bS USER E te AT 1 Se 5 T TE STO POTS rE splitter BEE ERE EE amp BEEEE EH amp MDF 1 Telephone cables DSL modem Q User with User with telephone telephone and DSL service only Telco service User with telephone service only Figure 8 1 Testing In house Wiring Table 8 7 Testing In house Wiring STEP TEST A Connect a standard telephone to MDF 1 If there is no dial tone then a problem with the wire or wire
56. VLAN ID Valid parameter range 1 4094 This command displays an entry with a specified VLAN ID in the static VLAN table Display a Static VLAN Table Entry Example The following figure is an example display of the following command 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan getentry 2 ad_control tag_control normal fixed untag normal untag Figure 31 5 Example Svlan Getentry 2 Command Display 31 3 8 SVLAN Delentry Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 vlan mgr gt svlan delentry lt vid gt where lt vid gt A VLAN ID Valid parameter range 1 4094 This command deletes an entry with a specified VLAN ID in the static VLAN table Delete a Static VLAN Entry Example The following example will delete the entry with VLAN ID 2 in the static VLAN table 192 168 1 1 vlan mgr gt svlan delentry 2 31 3 9 DVLAN List Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt dvlan list This command displays the dynamic VLAN registration table The following figure is an example of what is displayed when you use this command 31 8 IEEE 802 1QTagged VLAN Commands IES 1000 User s Guide lt B Q Vv Vv l Vv 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NA Ad EY Figure 31 6 Example DVLAN List Command Display In the figure above denotes filter and gt gt denotes forward 31 3 10 DVLAN Getentry Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt dvlan getentry lt vid gt where lt vid gt A VLAN ID Valid parameter ra
57. VLAN uses both explicit and implicit tagging Tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges tagged VLANs are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information a tagged header starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame VLAN 15 1 IES 1000 User s Guide TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits TPID has a defined value of 8100 hex The first three bits of the TCI define user priority giving eight priority levels The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a V
58. al L 2 PTS DSL 2 Figure 28 6 Example of Modified Port Filter Settings Ethernet 28 7 Tagged Ethernet Frames Commands Fast Mode The network module s fast mode makes use of the tag subset of the IEEE 802 10 standard to identify the source port of an Ethernet frame and speed traffic through a service gateway In this way the source port of a frame can be recognized across switches Fast mode reduces overhead by basing the forwarding decisions on the 802 10 tag instead of checking and filtering MAC addresses Fast mode allows only one port per PVID Use normal mode see 23 3 5 and the 802 1Q VLAN commands see Chapter 31 to configure VLANs or PVIDs with multiple ports 28 7 1 FPVID Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt fpvid lt port gt lt vid gt where Bridge Commands 28 7 IES 1000 User s Guide lt port gt The port number on the network module Port 0 is the CPU s port port 1 is the Ethernet port and ports 2 9 are the bridge ports on network module modules These are logical ports lt vid gt The tag number or IEEE 802 1Q identification that identifies the source port of an Ethernet frame Allocate tag numbers for all logical ports on your network module This command lets you allocate IEEE 802 1Q identification numbers tags on a port by port basis The command 192 168 1 1 bridge gt fpvid displays the default port identification of all network module ports The IEEE 8
59. and password to stay connected to the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 5 14 Fast Mode VLAN ID Setup Screen Click Fast Mode VLAN ID in the Bridge Setup screen to open this screen Bridge Fast Mode VLAN ID Setup PortNumber VLAN ID CPU y 7 Les l Apply Reset Figure 10 21 Bridge Fast Mode VLAN ID Setup The following table describes this screen Table 10 18 Bridge Fast Mode VLAN ID Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen Getting Started Screens 10 21 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 18 Bridge Fast Mode VLAN ID Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Number This is the port s name VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID number for the port The valid range is 1 4094 You cannot configure more than one port to use the same VLAN ID Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are
60. be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor ZyXEL will ship all repaired or replaced products to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country iv Warranty IES 1000 User s Guide Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Product model and serial number Customer Support gt Warranty information gt Date that you received your device gt Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it Method Support e mail Telephone Web Site Regular Mail Location Sales e mail Fax FTP Site Corporate support zyxel com tw 886 3 578 3942 www zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Corp Headquarters www europe zyxel com 6 Innovation Road II Worldwide Science Park sales zyxel com tw 886 3 578 2439 ftp zyxel com ftp europe zyxel com Hsinchu 30099 Taiwan Czech Republic info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 350 info cz zyxel com 420 241 091 359 www zyxel cz ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modranska 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Ceska Republika sales zyxel kz 7 3272 590 689 Denmark support zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 00 www zyxel dk ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej sales zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 07 2860 Soeborg Denmark Finland suppo
61. create a MAC address entry 2 BootpT ftp Server al f Spe Figure 36 1 BOOTP TFTP Server 5 The Input Box window will pop up as shown next Type the MAC address of the network module and then click OK You can find the MAC address of the network module on its boot console Zo J eneel Figure 36 2 Input MAC 6 Type the host IP address the IP address you want to assign to the network module server IP address the IP address of this computer net mask gateway and filename the new firmware name into the appropriate fields in the screen shown next Click Update Database Firmware Upload and Recovery 36 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Database Edit Dialog 192 168 1 254 Figure 36 3 Database Edit Dialog 7 Select Normal Bootp to enable normal BOOTP TFTP functions BootpT ftp Server ml o Figure 36 4 Enable BOOTP TFTP 8 Restart the network module and press any key within three seconds to get the following screen SDRAM Testing Mac address 00 A0 C5 12 34 56 Figure 36 5 Enter Debug Mode 9 Press any key at the Press any key within 3 seconds to enter debug mode pu message to enter the debug mode 36 4 Firmware Upload and Recovery IES 1000 User s Guide 10 Enter atnb at the network module boot console 11 Wait for the firmware upload to finish 12 Use the following command sequence on the network module to write new firmware to flash memory 192 168 1 1 gt fla
62. described in the following fields System Log IP Enter the IP address of the syslog server Address Log Facility Select one of 7 different options from the drop down list box The log facility allows you to log the message to different files in the server Please refer to your UNIX manual for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link in the navigation panel on the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this page afresh 18 2 1 Secured Client Screen Click Maintenance in the navigation panel and then Secured Client in the Maintenance screen to open the Secured Client Setup screen The Secured Client Setup screen configures trusted computers that may manage the IES 1000 Secured Client Setup TF Secured Enable Apply Address Delete Ada Delete Figure 18 2 Secured Client Setup The following table describes this screen Table 18 2 Secured Client Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Maintenance Click Maintenance to return to the main maintenance screen 18 2 Maintenance IES 1000 User s Guide Table 18 2 Secured Client Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Secured Enable Select this check box to allow these secured clients to manage the IES 1000
63. done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 6 IP Setup Screen The IES 1000 needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 The default gateway specifies the IP address of the default gateway next hop for outgoing traffic The default gateway is specified as 192 168 1 254 Click IP Setup in the navigation panel to open the IP Setup screen Use this screen to configure the IP address of the IES 1000 IP Setup IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway Apply Reset Figure 10 22 IP Setup The following table describes this screen Table 10 19 IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter the IP address of the IES 1000 in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of your IES 1000 in dotted decimal notation for example Mask 255 255 255 0 10 22 Getting Started Screens IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 19 IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for example Gateway 192 168 1 254 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses powe
64. e PA hal LA AT A aa Console OO x m pa ELG EL r we pa IN E ae A i 0 19 0 0 E Figure 3 1 AC Power Front Panel 3 3 DC Power Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the DC power version of the IES 1000 with a SAM1008 network module installed on the left and an AAM1008 network module on the right ZYXEL ica QO a 5 z gt T O A 3 gt au Lun TATA TATAN ATA console JA ATA TOOD al ramet we le Ll E El Figure 3 2 DC Power Front Panel Hardware Overview 3 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 3 3 1 Network Module Front Panel LEDs See the Turning On the IES 1000 chapter for details on the LED indicators on the front panel of a SAM1008 or AAM1008 network module 3 3 2 Front Panel Ports The following tables describe front panel ports Table 3 1 Front Panel Ports of the SAM1008 Network Module PORT DESCRIPTION LAN The LAN port is a 10 100 Mbps auto sensing Ethernet port that connects to a router or Ethernet switch SHDSL 1 8 These RJ 11 ports labeled 1 8 connect to subscriber G SHDSL equipment CONSOLE The CONSOLE port is an RJ 11 port used for configuring the IES 1000 This port connects to a local computer Table 3 2 Front Panel Ports of the AAM1008 Network Module PORT DESCRIPTION LAN The LAN port is a 10 100 Mbps auto sensing Ethernet port that connects to a router or Ethernet switch User 1 8
65. eee reenter eee ae crono cnn nono nn rro rca EPRA rra 6 12 Figure 6 13 Connecting the Power Cord to the IES 1000 and a Power Source ooooccncccccnoncconocanancninoncnonaaccnancnnno 6 13 Figure 6 14 Connecting IES 1000 PoWeT ooocnnccccnnnococinononcccnonononnnn non cnn nn anno rca nano rca ner rra 6 14 Figure 7 1 Location of the IES 1000 Fans niesme a A E NAE NE A 7 1 Figure 7 2 SAM1008 Front Panel LEDS uciiitr nd irradia lidades 7 2 Figure 7 3 AAM1008 Front Panel LEDS ui Ii 7 2 Figure 8 1 Testing In house Wining ossei aanere A N A E AEO A AAO 8 4 Figure 9 1 Password SCreen nesena di arad Medien iid a dba 9 1 xiv List of Figures IES 1000 User s Guide Figure 9 2 Home Sreo aa aaa Mae e ada dd do e a o ead eons 9 2 Elgure 9 3 Bridge Setup Example acto it 9 4 Figure 9 4 Bridge Packet Type Filter Setup Example oooooooccnnnnnoccnnnococcnonononcnn noc n cnn n nono cnn ron nc r rn nr 9 5 Figure 10 1 GEN tit 10 1 Figure10 2 Bridge SoU renia na A NE cine i ed Ailes bette 10 3 Figure 10 3 Bridge Packet Type Filter Setup ooooooonnnccinoncoccnnnococnnonononnnnonnno cnn nono nn nr nnno nn nr nn rra r nor rn rra 10 4 Figure 10 4 Default Port Fiter Settings sory arruan n o A seceded E A ashes iaceeta TA 10 6 Figure 10 5 Bridge Port Filter Setup oooonocccnnnncccnonocccccnononncccnnoncnc erent ee erent eee neater rancia rr 10 6 Figure 10 6 Edit Bridge Port Filter Setup ooononcccconnnccccnnnocccccnnoncnccnnoncncnnnoncn cc nnnn nn nc n
66. features 28 2 Bridge Port Numbers The bridge subsystem of the IES 1000 defines its own numbering convention for ports The bridge has a total of nine ports bridge port 1 stands for the Ethernet port bridge port 2 stands for DSL port 1 bridge port 3 stands for DSL port 2 and so on Be sure you have clarified the relation between bridge ports and DSL ports 28 3 Basic Commands 28 3 1 Config Save Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt config save This command saves the bridge configuration into nonvolatile memory You must use this command to save any configurations that you make otherwise the IES 1000 will return to its default settings when it is restarted Do not turn off your IES 1000 while saving your configuration 28 3 2 Device Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt device This command shows information on all bridge ports 28 3 3 Status Command Syntax Bridge Commands 28 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 192 168 1 1 bridge gt status This command displays the bridge management statistics 28 4 MAC Filter Commands Use MAC filter commands to filter incoming frames based on MAC Media Access Control address es that you specify If you do not use this command your IES 1000 will not filter frames MAC filter commands are listed next You may specify up to five MAC addresses per port 28 4 1 MAC Filter Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt macfilter lt port gt where port A bridge port num
67. for a response to a test ping The default number of minutes is 30 and the minimum is 1 The set timeout command sets how long the IES 1000 is to wait for a response to a test ping before performing a physical reset on the network module s Ethernet port Troubleshooting 37 5 Appendices and Index Part VI Appendices and Index A A VI IES 1000 User s Guide Appendix A Safety Warnings Refer to the Hardware Specifications appendix for the gauge of wire to use for each connection The length of exposed bare IES 1000 power wire should not exceed 7mm Do not use this product near water for example in a wet basement VV V WV Only a qualified technician should service or disassemble this device Safety Warnings A IES 1000 User s Guide Appendix B Removing and Installing a Fuse This appendix shows you how to remove and install fuses for the AC power IES 1000 The AC power IES 1000 uses one 250V 3A fuse The IES 1000 comes with two 250V 3A fuses one is installed at the factory in the fuse housing and the other is a spare also located inside the fuse housing If you need to install a new fuse follow the procedure below Before you begin you will need e A small flat head screwdriver e A 250V 3A fuse e Good lighting Removing and Installing Fuses Removing Fuses Safety first Disconnect all power from the IES 1000 before you begin this procedure Step 1 Place the front
68. for the specific port FlushAll Click this button to clear the MAC address listings for all of the ports 10 5 6 IGMP Snooping Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast one sender to one recipient or Broadcast one sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 and RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2 respectively A layer 2 switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query Report and Leave IGMP version 2 packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly Without IGMP snooping multicast traffic is treated in the same manner as broadcast traffic that is it is forwarded to all ports With IGMP snooping group multicast traffic is only forwarded to ports that are members of that group IGMP Snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch 10 5 7 IGMP Snooping Record Screen Click IGMP Snooping Record in the Bridge Setup screen to open this screen Getting Started Screens 10 13
69. is a type of encapsulation where by prior mutual agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP VC2 carries IPX and so on VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical 13 1 4 Virtual Channel Profile Virtual channel profiles allow you to configure the virtual channels efficiently You can configure all of the virtual channels with the same profile thus removing the need to configure the virtual channels one by one You can also change an individual virtual channel by assigning it a different profile The IES 1000 provides two default virtual channel profiles DEFVAL for LLC encapsulation and DEFVAL_VC for VC encapsulation By default all virtual channels are associated to DEFVAL 13 2 DSL Port Channel Setup Screen Do the following to open a port s Channel Setup screen Step 1 Click a DSL port s index number in the Port Setup screen to go to the Edit Port Setup screen Step 2 Click Channel Setup in the Edit Port Setup screen to go to the Channel Setup screen This screen is a summary screen that displays read only information about the DSL port s VPI VCI settings Channel Setup Port GSHDSL1 VPYVCIL Active PVID Priority Vc Profile Delete Yes a 7 DEFVAL u Add Delete Figure 13 1 DSL Port Channel Setup Table 13 1 DSL Port Channel Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VC Profile C
70. is using G dmt AAM1008 61 G dmt Annex B AAM1008 63 ETSI AAM1008 63 G lite or ANSI T1 413 issue 2 AAM1008 61 Number of An ADSL port on the network module uses one downstream channel and one upstream Channels channel Downstream This displays the framing mode that the network module uses on the traffic that it sends See 0 is full overhead framing with the synchronization control mechanism enabled asynchronous bit to modem timing 1 is full overhead framing with the synchronization control mechanism disabled synchronous bit to modem timing 2 is reduced overhead framing with separate fast and synchronization bytes in the respective fast and interleaved latency buffers This produces 64 kilobits per second of framing overhead 3 is reduced overhead framing with a merged fast and synchronization byte using either the fast or the interleaved latency buffer This produces 32 Kbps of framing overhead Active down up stream rate option This is the rate option currently being used for the down upstream channel TRELLIS operation mode is Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions Trellis may reduce throughput but it makes the connection more stable Down up stream The numbers of milliseconds of interleave delay for downstream and upstream interleaved transmissions are listed Delay Downstream This is the current number of downstream parity bytes
71. lt atur min margin gt The upstream minimum acceptable ADSL signal noise margin 0 31db lt atur max margin gt The upstream maximum acceptable ADSL signal noise margin 0 31db lt atur min rate gt The upstream minimum ADSL transmission rate in Kbps lt atuc target margin gt The downstream target ADSL signal noise margin 0 3 1db lt atuc min margin gt The downstream minimum acceptable ADSL signal noise margin 0 31db lt atuc max margin gt The downstream maximum acceptable ADSL signal noise margin 0 31db lt atuc min rate gt The downstream minimum ADSL transmission rate in Kbps ATU C atuc stands for ADSL Termination Unit Central and refers to downstream transmission and ATU R atur stands for ADSL Termination Unit Remote and refers to upstream transmission ADSL Commands 24 9 IES 1000 User s Guide The profile is a table that contains information on ADSL line configuration Each entry in this table reflects a parameter defined by a manager which can be used to configure the ADSL line Note that the default value will be used for any of the above fields that are omitted The upstream rate must be less than or equal to the downstream rate Even though you can specify arbitrary numbers in the set profile command the actual rate is always a multiple of 32 Kbps If you enter a rate that is not a multiple of 32 Kbps the actual rate will be the next lower multiple of 32Kbps For inst
72. materials or workmanship for a period ofup to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product is modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind of character to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will
73. may be dynamically learned on the port 10 10 Getting Started Screens IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 9 MAC Count Filter Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Static MAC This field s first number displays how many MAC addresses are statically specified for a port Count This field s second number displays the limit of how many MAC addresses may be statically specified on the port 10 5 4 MAC Count Filter Edit Screen Click port number in the MAC Count Filter Setup screen to open this screen MAC Count Filter Edit ADSL1 Filtering Enable Max Dynamic MAC Count 0 Max Static MAC Count 0 Apply Cancel Figure 10 11 MAC Count Filter Edit Table 10 10 MAC Count Filter Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen MAC Count Filter Click this link to go to the MAC Count Filter Setup screen Setup Filtering Enable Select this check box to enable MAC address count filtering on this port Max Dynamic Use this field to limit the number of MAC addresses that this port may dynamically learn For MAC Count example if you are configuring port 2 and you set this field to 5 then only five devices with dynamically learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out The MAC address aging out time can be set in the Bridge MAC Address Record screen see Figure 10 12 The
74. n wire group s Delete check box and click the Delete button to remove the n wire group You cannot delete an n wire group that is part of a port bonding group You must first delete the port bonding group before you can delete an n wire group that is a member of the port bonding group With 4 wire groups you must delete group 1 before you can delete group 2 You also need to delete group 3 before you can delete group 4 Bonding This field displays the name of a port bonding group they are listed in alphabetical order Name Mode This field displays the type of bonding units bonded in the port bonding group as well as which side of the connection this port bonding group is For example 2 wireSTU C means port units are used on the SHDSL Terminal Unit Central side 4 wireSTU R means 4 wire group units are used on the SHDSL Terminal Unit Remote side Member List This field displays the ports or n wire groups that belong to a port bonding group Add Click this button to configure a new port bonding group Delete Select a port bonding group s Delete check box and click the Delete button to remove the port bonding group 12 8 1 G SHDSL Profile Setup Screen A profile is a list of settings that you define Then you can assign them to one or more individual ports G SHDSL Module Port Setup 12 5 IES 1000 User s Guide Click the Profile Setup link in the Port Setup screen to go to the Profile Setup screen GSHD
75. notation and the default gateway set at 192 168 1 254 Make sure that you configure the IP parameters correctly before you connect an IES 1000 to the network otherwise you may interrupt services already running 33 2 General IP Commands The following is a list of general IP commands that help with the management of the IP parameters 33 2 1 Config Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ip gt config save This command shows the IP configuration The save option saves the configuration to the nonvolatile memory 33 2 2 Version Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ip gt version This command shows the IP version and MAC address of the network module 33 2 3 Ping Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ip gt ping lt host gt lt ttl gt lt size gt where 33 2 IP Commands IES 1000 User s Guide lt host gt The IP address of the target lt ttl gt Time to Live optional This parameter limits the number of hops routers that the echo request can travel before it reaches the target lt size gt The parameter specifies the size of the payload that is not counting the headers of the echo request The default size is 32 octets This is an IP facility to check for network functionality by sending an echo request to another IP host and waiting for the reply 33 2 4 Statistics Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ip gt stats lt sub cmd gt reset This command shows or resets the statistics for the traffic of the type speci
76. of the device s interface lt ipmask gt The subnet mask of the device s IP address This command sets the Ethernet port s IP address subnet mask and the largest packet size that this interface sends IP Commands 33 5 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 34 Remote Management This chapter shows you how to manage the IES 1000 remotely 34 1 Remote Management Introduction More often than not you will have the IES 1000 located remotely making its remote management features very useful See the web configurator chapter on SNMP for background information on SNMP 34 2 Management by Telnet After you have set up the IP parameters and connected the IES 1000 to the network you can manage it remotely with telnet You can use any telnet client that you find convenient The configuration procedures with telnet are exactly the same as those using the direct connection via the console port The default password for a telnet session is 1234 Although telnet will work while the console port is being used only one telnet session is allowed at a time 34 3 SNMP Access Configuration To control access to the agent in the network module use the access commands in the SNMP subsystem Note that community is SNMP s terminology for password After configuring the SNMP access parameters save the configuration to the nonvolatile memory with the config save command The default write community string is 1234 and the default r
77. one level to the Packet Type Filter Setup screen shown next Bridge Packet Type Filter Setup Port Number Packet Filter Type E fay y 1 any y 2 any y 3 any y 4 any y 5 any h 6 any v 7 any hd Apply Reset Figure 9 4 Bridge Packet Type Filter Setup Example Click the link labeled Bridge Setup in the Packet Type Filter Setup screen to go back up a level and view the Bridge Setup screen Web Configurator Access and Navigation 9 5 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 10 Getting Started Screens This chapter explains the General Setup and Bridge Setup screens 10 1 Getting Started Overview The web configurator allows you to configure basic settings using the Getting Started screens 10 2 General Setup Screen Click General Setup in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to set up general identification information for the IES 1000 Welcome to JES 1000 AAM1008 63 Web Setup System Name TE Location ET A i m Contact Person s Name Chassis ID Shot iD Apply Reset Figure 10 1 General Setup The following table describes this screen Table 10 1 General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Type a descriptive name for identification purposes This name can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters long Location Type the geographic location up to 31 characters of your IES 1000 Contact Person s Type the name up to 31 characters of the perso
78. port on a per VLAN per port basis recall that a port can be members of multiple VID If the tagging on the egress port is enabled for the VID of a frame then the frame is transmitted as a tagged frame otherwise it is transmitted as an untagged frame 15 4 Filtering Databases A filtering database stores and organizes VLAN registration information useful for switching frames to and from a LAN bridge A filtering database consists of a static entries Static VLAN or SVLAN table and dynamic entries Dynamic VLAN or DVLAN table 15 4 1 Static Entries SVLAN Table Static entry registration information is added modified and removed by management only 15 4 2 Dynamic Entries DVLAN Table Dynamic entries are learned by the bridge and cannot be created or updated by management The bridge learns this information by observing what port source address and VLAN ID or VID is associated with a frame Entries are 15 2 VLAN IES 1000 User s Guide added and deleted using GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP where GARP is the Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 15 5 Automatic VLAN Registration GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches 15 6 GARP GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network devices to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for prot
79. ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring ID This field displays the location of the entry in the multicast filtering database VLAN ID This is the VLAN ID Virtual LAN ID for the multicast group Group IP This field displays the multicast IP address of a multicast group Address MAC Address This field displays the last three bytes of the MAC address to which the multicast group is mapped 10 14 Getting Started Screens IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 12 Bridge IGMP Snooping Record LABEL DESCRIPTION Member Ports This field displays the ports that belong to this multicast group E Ethernet 1 8 ADSL ports 1 through 8 Refresh Click this button to update the multicast filtering record FlushAll Click this button to clear the multicast filtering record 10 5 8 DHCP Relay DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a DHCP server You can configure the Integrated Ethernet Switch to relay client TCP IP configuration requests to a DHCP server and the server s responses back to the clients 10 5 9 DHCP Relay Agent Information Opt
80. punch down tool 6 2 Hardware Connections IES 1000 User s Guide OD00 Oooo Figure 6 3 SHDSL Port and MDF Connections Step 3 Connect a different telephone wire to the lower port of the MDF using a punch down tool Step 4 Connect the other RJ 11 end of the telephone wire to the end user G SHDSL modem router When you finish this procedure your connections should look similar to the figure shown next Connections between the user s computer and modem router are not described here Hardware Connections 6 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Figure 6 4 SHDSL Port MDF and User Equipment Connections Notes About MDFs Main Distribution Frames An MDF is usually installed between end users equipment and the telephone company CO in a basement or telephone room The MDF is the point of termination for the outside telephone company lines coming into a building and the telephone lines in the building 6 4 Hardware Connections IES 1000 User s Guide lowerports Figure 6 5 Magnified View of MDF Wiring Connect wiring from end user equipment to the lower ports of an MDF using a telephone wire Connect wiring from the telephone company to the upper ports of an MDF see the previous figure Some MDFs have surge protection circuitry built in between the two banks thus do not connect telephone wires from the telephone company directly to the IES 1000 Use a punch down tool to seat telep
81. refer to Chapter 33 37 4 Troubleshooting IES 1000 User s Guide Table 37 10 Troubleshooting Telnet STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 3 If you are attempting to telnet from the DSL side of the network module refer to section 37 2 to make sure that you can transmit data to the network module 4 If you are attempting to telnet from the Ethernet side of the network module check the Ethernet cable 5 Make sure that the network module s IP settings are configured properly refer to Chapter 33 If these steps fail to correct the problem contact the distributor 37 11 Ethernet Port Use the following commands if the Ethernet port connection repeatedly goes down without any logical explanation 37 11 1 Ethernet Device Driver Test Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 edd gt test lt ip gt where lt ip gt The IP address of the device that you want the Ethernet port to continuously ping Use 0 0 0 0 to stop the test The test command sets the network module s Ethernet port to ping the specified IP address every ten seconds If there is no ping response after the timeout period expires see the set timeout command the IES 1000 performs a physical reset on the network module s Ethernet port 37 11 2 Ethernet Device Driver Set Timeout Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 edd gt set timeout lt of minutes gt where lt of minutes gt The number of minutes you want the IES 1000 to wait
82. route lt timeout gt The timeout period of this static route in seconds This command defines a new static IP forwarding route or edits an existing one Type route without any parameters to view a list of the configured static routes Use 0 s for the destination IP address and subnet mask to configure a default static route for the device The device uses the default static route to forward packets for which it cannot find another route The following is the syntax for configuring a static route 192 168 1 1 ip gt route add lt dom name gt 0 0 0 0 lt relay gt 00 00 00 00 33 2 9 Route Delete Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ip gt route delete lt dom name gt where lt dom name gt The name of the static route This command removes a static IP forwarding route 33 2 10 Route Flush Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ip gt route flush This command removes all of the static IP forwarding routes 33 2 11 Enable Command Your telnet session disconnects when you change the Ethernet port s IP address Initiate a telnet session to the new IP address in order to reconnect 33 4 IP Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Syntax LOZ 168i 1 1 ip gt enable lt if gt mtu lt size gt lt ip gt lt ipmask gt where lt i f gt The name of an interface ether for this device mtu lt size gt Maximum Transmit Unit The maximum packet size that this interface is to send lt ip gt The IP address
83. screen afresh 11 9 10 100M Auto Sensing Ethernet The IES 1000 supports 10 100Mbps auto negotiating Ethernet There are two factors related to the connection of two Ethernet ports speed and duplex mode In a 10 100Mbps fast Ethernet the speed can be 10Mbps or 100Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex The auto negotiation capability makes one Ethernet port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the optimal connection speed and duplex mode ADSL Module Port Setup 11 7 IES 1000 User s Guide When auto negotiation is turned on the Ethernet port of the IES 1000 negotiates with the peer Ethernet port on the Ethernet cable automatically to determine the optimal connection speed and duplex mode If the peer Ethernet port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the IES 1000 determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the IES 1000 s auto negotiation is turned off the Ethernet port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode settings when making a connection thus requiring you to check the settings of the peer Ethernet port in order to connect 11 9 1 Ethernet Port Setup Screen Click 0 in the Port Setup screen to open this screen Ethernet Pon Setup Ethemet Mode Auto Default 802 1p Priority 0 802 10 VLAN Default VLAN ID GVRP VLAN Acceptable Frame Type r pE Apply Reset
84. screen to check the module s DSL chip via Local Loopback or connections via OAM ES tests DSL Line Diagnostic Por TE Local Loopback OAM F5 Loopback Figure 20 2 DSL Line Diagnostic Table 20 4 DSL Line Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION Diagnostic Click this link to go to the network module s Diagnostic screen Diagnostic 20 5 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 20 4 DSL Line Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This refers to the DSL port number Select a port upon which you want to perform a loopback test Local Loopback Click this to perform a local loopback test on the specified DSL port A local loopback test is used to check the device s DSL chip A local loopback test failure indicates an internal device problem OAM F5 Click this to perform an OAM F5 loopback test on the specified DSL port An Operation Loopback Administration and Maintenance Function 5 test is used to test the connection between two DSL devices First the DSL devices establish a virtual circuit Then the local device sends an ATM F5 cell to be returned by the remote DSL device both DSL devices must support ATM F5 in order to use this test The results Passed or Failed display in the multi line text box 20 3 3 Reset System Click Diagnostic in the navigation panel and then click the Reset System button and click OK to restart the system Microsoft Internet Explorer
85. seconds contained at least one errored block or at least one defect n ses The number of severely errored seconds This is how many seconds contained 30 or more errored blocks or at least one defect This is a subset of n es non ses blks The number of non Severely Errored Second SES blocks at the far ds or near us end This is the total number of super frames received during non SES seconds n uas The number of unavailable seconds fe ne_loss_s econds The number of loss seconds accumulated at the far fe or near ne end fe ne fec_se conds The current number of seconds with one or more errors at the far fe or near ne end fast trains 0 The current count of the total number of fast retrains in the performance period 15 minutes fail 0 fast trains_ The current count of the total number of fast retrains that have failed in the performance period 15 minutes 24 3 9 Syntax Linerate Command 192 168 1 1 adsl gt linerate lt port number gt where lt port number gt A port number from 1 to 8 The linerate command shows the line rate parameters of an ADSL port ADSL Commands 24 7 IES 1000 User s Guide An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 adsl gt linerate 7 Current Active Rates ASO downstream rate 2048 Kbps AS1 downstream rate 0 Kbps LSO upstream rate 512 Kbps LS1 upstream rate 0 Kbps Down up stream Margin 31 22 dB Down
86. service Figure 6 11 Installation Scenario C Procedure To Connect To MDFs Step 1 Acquire two additional MDFs 3 and 4 Step 2 Connect the RJ 11 connector ends of telephone wires you want for ADSL service to the USER ports on the AAM1008 Step 3 Connect the other ends of the telephone wires to the upper ports of MDF 3 using a punch down tool Step 4 Connect the lower ports of MDF 3 to the upper ports of MDF 2 for those users that want ADSL service Users who want telephone service only retain the original connection from the top port of MDF 2 to the bottom port of MDF 1 Step 5 Connect the telephone wiring from the end user s ADSL equipment to the lower ports of MDF 2 Step 6 Connect the RJ 11 connector ends of telephone wires you want for voice service to the AAM1008 s CO ports Step 7 Connect the other ends of the telephone wires to the lower ports of MDF 4 using a punch down tool Step 8 Connect the top ports of MDF 4 to the bottom ports of MDF 1 using regular telephone wires Hardware Connections 6 11 IES 1000 User s Guide Connect the top ports of MDF 1 to the telephone company 6 4 5 LAN Port Ethernet Connection Connect the LAN port of your SAM1008 to an Ethernet WAN switch using a straight through Category 5 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair cable with RJ 45 connectors Connect the other end of the cable to an Ethernet switch You may stack multiple IES 1000 units up to the number of ports available
87. the List ports command to view the status of all ports 25 3 17 Set PVC Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set pvc lt port gt lt multiplexing mode gt lt tx vpi gt lt tx vci gt lt rx vpi gt lt rx vci gt where lt port gt A port number from to 8 lt multiplexing mode gt Either lle or ve lt tx vpi gt The VPI setting of the G SHDSL port for use with a Tx based network lt tx vci gt The VCI setting for the G SHDSL port for use with a Tx based network lt rx vpi gt The VPI setting for the G SHDSL port for use with Rx based networks lt rx VC1 gt The VCI setting for the G SHDSL port for use with Rx based 25 8 G SHDSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide networks The lt rx vpi gt and lt rx vci gt settings will be equal to those of lt tx vpi gt and lt tx vci gt ifthe rx settings are not configured The set pvc command allows the configuration of a PVC permanent virtual circuit for an individual G SHDSL port 25 3 18 Set PVCs Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set pvcs lt multiplexing mode gt lt tx vpi gt lt tx vci gt lt rx vpi gt lt rx vci gt where lt multiplexing mode gt Either lle or ve lt tx vpi gt The VPI setting of the G SHDSL ports for use with a Tx based network lt tx vci gt The VCI setting for the G SHDSL ports for use with a Tx based network lt rx vpi gt The VPI setting for the G SHDSL ports for use with Rx b
88. the position of the IES 1000 does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit Hardware Installation 4 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 4 4 1 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the IES 1000 Step 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the IES 1000 lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the unit see the figure shown next Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit Das A vi oh eV aos Die y A A r o gt gt E o a a m9 gt L l ATA a y a terre x a fe 5 Le Figure 4 1 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the IES 1000 Step 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws that came with the brackets through the mounting bracket holes into the IES 1000 Step 3 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the unit You may now mount the IES 1000 on a rack Proceed to the next section 4 4 2 Mounting the IES 1000 on a Rack Step 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the IES 1000 on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack see the figure shown next Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 4 2 Hardware Installation IES 1000 User s Guide esa El yO O
89. the specified start port to the end lt startPort gt lt stopPort gt Shows port statistics of GSHDSL ports from the specified start port to the specified end port ver Shows version information of GSHDSL modem code and driver loopback lt portNo gt local 5 Does a local OAM F5 loopback test on the specified GSHDSL port stat ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Shows the statistics of the specified PVC channel chs lt start port gt lt end port gt Shows the statistics of all PVC channels in all ports or in the specified port clear ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Clears the statistics of the specified PVC channel chs lt start port gt lt end port gt Clears the statistics of all PVC channels in all ports or in the specified port hmon display Shows the temperature values 22 14 Commands Introduction IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION ip arp add lt if gt lt ip gt lt mac gt Adds ARP record lt ip gt lt mac gt to interface lt if gt delete lt if gt lt ip gt Deletes ARP record lt ip gt from interface lt if gt flush Flushes all cached ARP records list Lists all resolved ARP records help Shows a help message for the ARP command config Shows the IP module s run time configuration save Saves the IP module s configuration to the nonvolatile memory e
90. to fine tune the levels of services on the priority of the traffic flow 13 4 Traffic Shaping Traffic shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections 13 4 1 ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification Constant Bit Rate CBR Constant Bit Rate CBR is an ATM traffic class that provides fixed bandwidth CBR traffic is generally time sensitive doesn t tolerate delay CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth Examples of connections that need CBR would be high resolution video and voice Virtual Channel Management 13 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Variable Bit Rate VBR The Variable Bit Rate VBR ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate VBR traffic class can be grouped into real time rt VBR or non real time nrt VBR connections The rt VBR real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation An example of an rt VBR connection would be video conferencing Video conferencing requires real time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in p
91. to physically bundle together into an N wire group and which side of the connection this n wire group is Each port uses two wires so a 4 wire group consists of two ports and an 8 wire group consists of four ports For example 4 wireSTU C means two ports on the SHDSL Terminal Unit Central side 8 wireSTU R means four ports on the SHDSL Terminal Unit Remote side You can bundle multiple groups of ports as long as they do not overlap One SAM1008 module can have both STU C and STU R groups Make sure that G SHDSL ports one through four are all the same end of their connections all STU C or all STU R Make sure that G SHDSL ports five through eight are all the same end of their connections all STU C or all STU R G SHDSL ports one through four do not need to be set to be the same end of the connection as G SHDSL ports five through eight For example G SHDSL ports one through four could be set to be STU C while G SHDSL ports five through eight are set to be STU R Group Number Select which ports are to be members of this bundled n wire group With a 4 wire group select 4 for ports seven and eight 3 for ports five and six 2 for ports three and four or 1 for ports one and two You must configure 4 wire group 4 before group 3 and group 2 before group 1 Although you can configure groups 2 and 1 before configuring groups 4 and 3 it is recommended that you configure 4 wire groups from right to left higher numbers to lower
92. up stream Attenuation 0 0 dB Attainable Down up stream Rate 11456 1344 Kbps Figure 24 4 Linerate Command Example These results contain the current downstream and upstream operating values SHOWTIME for the requested line the latest available downstream and upstream margins channel attenuation and the maximum attainable rate Downstream and upstream margins must both be at least 6 dB The initial downstream and upstream margins are first set during training The upstream margin is recalculated every 15 seconds during show time at the ATU C and the downstream margin updates every 15 seconds during show time by using EOC messaging Information obtained prior to training to steady state transition will not be valid or will be old information 24 3 10 Line Delay Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt ldly lt ports port number gt lt downstream value gt lt upstream value gt lt Symbol MilliSec gt where lt ports port number gt All ofthe ADSL ports or a single port from 1 to 8 lt downstream value gt The downstream interleave latency delay 0 255 lt upstream value gt z The upstream interleave latency delay 0 255 milliseconds lt Symbol MilliSec gt Set the measurement of the interleave delay to use with symbols or milliseconds Sets or displays the maximum interleave latency delay 24 3 11 List Port Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt list port lt port number gt where lt
93. with the same number of ports set to connect to the other SAM1008 and n wire bundled You can n wire bundle multiple groups of ports as long as they do not overlap One SAM1008 module can have both STU C and STU R groups Make sure that G SHDSL ports one through four are all the same end of their connections all STU C or all STU R 25 10 G SHDSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Make sure that G SHDSL ports five through eight are all the same end of their connections all STU C or all STU R G SHDSL ports one through four do not need to be set to be the same end of the connection as G SHDSL ports five through eight For example G SHDSL ports one through four could be set to be STU C while G SHDSL ports five through eight are set to be STU R The following example sets an STU C 8 wire mode 4 ports group with the name N wire A for ports 1 to 4 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set nwirec 8w N wire A 1 Make sure you set all of the ports in an n wire group to have the same PVID see section 31 3 3 PVID Command If the ports are enabled and you change them from central side to remote side or vice versa all ports are set to the central side by default the system will take a few moments to process the change If the ports are not enabled the processing occurs when you enable them During this processing the system appears to be hanging 25 3 23 Set Remote Side N wire Mode Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set nwirer lt mode
94. x 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system Cancel Figure 20 3 Reboot System Confirmation 20 4 Logout Screen Click Logout in the navigation panel to open this screen and exit the web configurator 20 6 Diagnostics IES 1000 User s Guide Thank you for using the Web Configurator Goodbye Figure 20 4 Logout Diagnostic 20 7 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 21 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies After each problem description some steps are provided to help you to diagnose and to solve the problem 21 1 DSLLED s A DSL LED is not on Table 21 1 Troubleshooting the DSL LED s STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure the DSL port is enabled refer to the sections on the edit port setup screens 2 Connect a DSL modem directly to the DSL port of the IES 1000 using a different telephone wire If the LED turns on go to step 4 3 Check to see that the settings in the DSL modem or router match those of the DSL port refer to the sections on the edit port setup screens If the DSL LED stays off there may be a problem with the port Contact the distributor 4 Take the DSL modem to the subscriber s location If the DSL LED stays off check for a problem with the telephone wiring that connects to the subscriber 21 2 Data Transmission The DSL LED 1s on but data cannot be transmitted Table 21 2 Trou
95. xvi List of Figures IES 1000 User s Guide Figure 20 3 Reboot System ConfirMatiON oooonnncccnnnococinnnonccnnononcnnnnn nono AAAA a AENDA AAR anne 20 6 Figure 2054 LOGU ar e EE E E EE E E ses Lege teeiteeae 20 7 Figure 24 1 Linedata Command Example cococoonocccccncoocccccononcncnanoncncnnnoncnn canon rca rcnnn rca rra rn r ranma rra 24 4 Figure 24 2 Lineinfo Command Example as enseia eaaa e EARRA nn rr canon nr cnn rra rre rra 24 4 Figure 24 3 Lineperf Command Example ccccececceceeeeeeeeeeeaeaeceeeee cece caaeaeeeeeeeseeeaaaeaeeeeeedeceseceaeeeeeesecseneeeeess 24 6 Figure 24 4 Linerate Command Example 0 ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeesniaeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 24 8 Figure 24 5 List Profiles Command ExaMple ooooocoonoccccconocccccononcccconnoncncnnno conc nono nn nn cnno nn nr rrnnn nn r ran rr rr rn 24 11 Figure 24 6 Show Profile Command Example 0 cece nee es tees ee nono nonnnn nc coca nnncnc ESSA nn rc naar nr rr naar nn cn nnnnnncccnnns 24 12 Figure 25 1 List Port Command Example oooooonncccconnococinononcccnononnnncnn nono cnn nano rca ran nn ar anna r anna nnnr rra 25 4 Figure 25 2 List Profiles CommandiExample cocinan tr 25 7 Figure 25 3 List N wire Groups Command Example 2 c ccccceceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeececeaaaeaeeeeeeesecsncaeeeeeeeenseesnceeeees 25 15 Figure 26 1 Show VCP Command Example ronssin aiaa non conca nano nn aa NRE anna AAAA NE ARER 26 3 Figure 26
96. 0 chassis gt Install network modules into the chassis gt Use the web configurator or command line interface to manage and troubleshoot the AAM 1008 61 AAM 1008 63 and SAM 1008 modules See the AAM 1212 User s Guide for information on the AAM 1212 51 53 network modules IES 1000 Network Module Models and Firmware Releases The IES 1000 supports the following modules The firmware version contains a model code In firmware version V2 05 DN 1 for example DN is the model code gt AAMI1008 61 for ADSL over POTS Annex A DN denotes the firmware version gt AAM1008 63 for ADSL over ISDN Annex B DJ denotes the firmware version gt SAM1008 for G SHDSL DD denotes the firmware version gt AAM 1212 51 for ADSL over POTS Annex A ABA denotes the firmware version gt AAM 1212 53 for ADSL over ISDN Annex B ABP denotes the firmware version A firmware version also includes the firmware s release number In firmware version V2 05 DN 1 for example 0 is the firmware s release number This varies as new firmware is released Your firmware s release number may not match what is displayed in this User s Guide Naming Conventions gt The IES 1000 Integrated Ethernet Switch may be referred to as the IES or the switch gt The AAM1008 ADSL Access Module may be referred to as the AAM the ADSL module the DSL module or the module gt There the AAM1008 61 is for ADSL over POT
97. 000 User s Guide Chapter 17 Logins This chapter explains how to change the IES 1000 s passwords 17 1 Logins Overview The Logins screen allows you to configure the administrator password 17 2 Logins Screen Click Logins in the navigation panel to open the Logins screen Use the Logins screen to set administrator passwords for the IES 1000 It is highly recommended that you change the default password 1234 Logins Adminstrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Cancel Figure 17 1 Logins The following table describes this screen Table 17 1 Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Type your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Logins 17 1 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 17 1 Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link in the navigation panel on the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this page afresh
98. 000 as shown next Step 2 Push the bottom of the front of the module into the IES 1000 The front of the module should be flush with the IES 1000 chassis 5 2 Removing and Installing Network Modules IES 1000 User s Guide Figure 5 4 Installing a Network Module into the IES 1000 Chassis The front of the network module must be flush with the front of the IES 1000 after you install a network module or it will not work Step 3 Secure the module to the chassis by turning the two screws on the front of the module clockwise as shown next Figure 5 5 Tighten Module Screws Removing and Installing Network Modules 5 3 Hardware Connections Part II Hardware Connections and Troubleshooting This part covers how to connect the IES 1000 and turn it on It also covers how to troubleshoot the hardware IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 6 Hardware Connections This chapter shows you how and where to make hardware connections Before you make your hardware connections make sure that your IES 1000 is safely and securely positioned 6 1 Front Panel Connections All connections are made on the front panel of the IES 1000 The following figure shows the front panel connections of the SAM1008 Connect A to a power source B is an Ethernet switch Connect C to the users D is a local management computer A more detailed discussion follows Connections for the AAM1008 are the same except for the DSL po
99. 02 1Q standard uses an explicit tag in the header to specify the VLAN ID VID of an Ethernet frame In this way the VLAN membership of a frame can be carried across switches The following table displays the physical port and corresponding default PVID tag on the IES 1000 Table 28 1 Physical Ports Port Numbers and IES 1000 Default PVID Tags in Fast Mode PHYSICAL PORT PORT NUMBER DEFAULT PVID TAG CPU Central Processing Unit 0 1 Network Module LAN Port Ethernet N A DSL Port 1 DSL Port 2 DSL Port 3 DSL Port 4 DSL Port 5 DSL Port 6 DSL Port 7 DSL Port 8 O O XA D OI A O0 N O O XA D OI A O0 N 28 8 Bridge Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 29 DHCP Relay Commands This chapter describes how to use the DHCP Relay commands 29 1 DHCP Relay Overview Refer to the web configurator part for background information on DHCP 29 2 DHCP Relay Commands Use these commands to configure the DHCP relay feature 29 2 1 Add Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt add lt ip gt where lt ip gt The IP address of a DHCP server The add command adds a DHCP server to the list of servers to which the IES 1000 relays client TCP IP configuration requests 29 2 2 Config Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt config The config command displays the list of servers to which the IES 1000 relays client TCP IP configuration reque
100. 1000 ChasSiS ooooocciinnnccnnnnacocccnnioccccnnnorccnnnnorn cnn nn nnarnnnnn 5 2 Figure 5 4 Installing a Network Module into the IES 1000 Chassis oooonccccnnnonocinnnococinonioncccnn nono cann noc cnn rr narran 5 3 Figure 5 5 Tighten Module SOEWS saroian neiaa Rr a E ah A AAE A ANES ARAE dto 5 3 Figure 6 1 SAM1008 Front Panel Connections Overview oooonccccnnncoccnnnoccccnononcccnnn nro cn nono nc rnnn nr rc 6 1 Figure 6 2 Console Port Connection ooooonccccnnnnccccnnnonccinononcccnnnn nc cnn nan r cnn rra 6 2 Figure 6 3 SHDSL Port and MDF CoNNectiONS ooononcccnnnoccccnnnnoncccnnnoncccnn nono cn oran cnn rr rra 6 3 Figure 6 4 SHDSL Port MDF and User Equipment Connections ccccceceeeeeeneeceeeeeeeseceneaecaeeeeeeesetsnnieaeeeeeess 6 4 Figure 6 5 Magnified View Of MDF WiriNQ oooooocccnnnnnccnnnnnccccnnnococnnnnorcccnnn noc cnn cn anar nn rr rr rr 6 5 Figure 6 6 AAM1008 Installation Overview o ooooooonicccnnnncccconnnoncccnnnonc canon ocn rr 6 6 Figues G Installation SENA A ceci tddi 6 7 Figure 6 8 One MDF for End user and CO Connections ooooonocccccnnocccinininocccno nono ca nono rc cc nro rra rar rn 6 8 Figure 6 9 Installation Scenano Baricco 6 9 Figure 6 10 Two Separate MDF s for End user and CO Connections oooooococinncocccnnoconanonononcnnn nano na nr rnno nc rra rca 6 10 Figure 6 11 Installation Scenario O rreri rana R e eR ARAE a desea sane eden pei een eae 6 11 Figure 6 12 Stacking Multiple IES 1000 Units
101. 17 2 Logins IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 18 Maintenance This chapter explains how to use the maintenance screens to set the Unix syslog parameters and remote management as well as perform firmware and configuration file maintenance 18 1 Maintenance Overview The Maintenance screen allows you to set UNIX syslog parameters It also provides links to the Secured Client Firmware Upgrade Restore Configuration and Backup Configuration screens 18 2 Maintenance Screen Click Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the Maintenance screen Use the Maintenance screen to set UNIX syslog parameters Maintenance M Unix System Log System log IP Address 0 0 0 0 Log Facility Local 1 x Apply Reset Figure 18 1 Maintenance The following table describes this screen Table 18 1 Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Secured Client Click this link to configure clients for secure remote IES 1000 access via Telnet FTP and Web Firmware Upgrade Click this link to upgrade firmware Restore Click this link to restore a previously saved configuration file Configuration Maintenance 18 1 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 18 1 Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Backup Use the Backup link to save your current configuration to a computer Configuration UNIX System Log Select this check box to activate syslog UNIX system logging and then configure the UNIX syslog parameters
102. 3 6 Logs Lost 23 5 System Error Logging 1 3 Logs Sent 23 5 System Name 10 1 UNIX Syslog Commands 23 5 T UNIX Syslog Logging 1 3 Table of Contents vi Unspecified Bit Rate 13 4 13 7 Tagged Ethernet Frames 28 7 Upload Firmware Taiwanese BSMI A Warning iii File Types 36 1 Target SNR db 11 7 Protocols 36 1 TAT 13 6 Timing 36 1 Telco Rack Space 1 4 Upstream 11 6 Telephone Wire H Upstream us 24 7 Telnet 6 1 34 1 Upstream Max Rate Kbps 11 5 Temperature G Uptime Command 23 1 Terminal emulation 22 1 User name 2 1 Terminal Emulation 3 1 22 1 User s Guide 8 1 Testing In house Wiring 8 4 V TFTP 35 1 36 2 Variable Bit Rate 13 4 Theoretical Arrival Time 13 6 VC Mux 13 2 13 10 Trademarks ii VCI 13 10 Traffic Shaping 13 3 Vendor ID 24 6 Trap Add Command 34 2 Version Command 23 1 Trap Configuration 34 2 Version Number 24 6 Trap Delete Command 34 3 Virtual Channel Profile 13 2 Trap Flush Command 34 3 VLAN 15 1 21 1 21 3 37 1 Trap List Command 34 3 Aware Devices 31 1 Troubleshooting 21 1 37 1 Explicit Tagging 15 1 Turning On Your IES 1000 7 1 ID VID 15 2 28 8 U Implicit Tagging 15 1 UBR 13 4 13 7 Port Based 10 5 UNIX Syslog Registration Information 15 2 Index Q IES 1000 User s Guide Tags 31 1 Warning Sticker 6 12 Unware Devices 31 1 Warnings A iii VLAN Acceptable Frame Type 11 9 11 11 12 9 Warranty iv VLAN Disable Command 31 3 Weight G VLAN Enable Command 31 3 Wire Gauge H VLAN List Command 31 9 Wiring Testing 8 4 VPI 13 10 W
103. 34 Remote Management da 34 1 34 1 Remote Management Introduction ooonoccconoconnconnnonnnonnnonncnanonnn nono nooo nooo no nono no naco nn cnn rar rn rra rr rra 34 1 34 2 Management by Delta a laa esteted ack dass 34 1 34 3 SNMP Access Congrats ibi 34 1 344 SNMP Trap Conti surtir 34 2 Chapter 35 Configuration Backup Restore ooooccncincncococincccciconononccnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnianannes 35 1 xii Table of Contents IES 1000 User s Guide 35 1 Configuration Files of the Network Module 00 ccccccceccsecsseessecsecssecesecnseceseeeseeeseeesaecsaecaaecsaeenseenaeenas 35 1 33 2 Configuration Back it A A E ci 35 1 35 3 Conti guration Resto vita ii ita 35 1 Chapter 36 Firmware Upload and Recovery cececeeccececeeeeeeeneaeceeeeeeeeeeceaaeceeeeeeesecaaeceseeeeeesensnsiaeeeeeess 36 1 36 1 FTP Firmware Upload on the Network Module cccccccccesscesssessceeeceeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseecsaecsuecssecnaeenseenes 36 1 36 2 BOOTP TFTP Firmware Recovery of the Network Module oooooooonocnnncnnocnnocnconnoonnoon ccoo nononocnocononnos 36 2 Chapters Troubleshooting ita raid 37 1 37 1 SHDSEOr ADSL LLED arica dad rl Ad as 37 1 E O ON 37 1 37 3 SHDSL or ADSL LED s Turn On and Off ccc cccccceseceseceseceeceecseeeeeeeeeseceseeeaeecsaeeaecnaeceseenaeenes 37 2 STA Mata Rate sees vz ertir ie E e EAA EEEE EE AE E dete ceed oc Peay ae E AE E E E E TE 37 2 35 PO Bode a
104. 600 No auto on 3600 No auto on 3600 No auto on 3600 No auto on 3600 No auto on 3600 Figure 10 18 802 1X Setup Table 10 15 802 1X Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen RADIUS Server Click this link to go to the screen where you can configure the RADIUS server settings 802 1X Enable Select this check box and click Apply to turn on IEEE 802 1X authentication on the IES 1000 Port Number Click a port s index number to go to that port s Edit 802 1X Setup screen Active This field displays whether Yes or not No IEEE 802 1X authentication is enabled on this port 10 18 Getting Started Screens IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 15 802 1X Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Control When this field displays Auto the IES 1000 authenticates all subscribers before they can access the network through this port When this field displays Force Authorized all connected users are allowed to access the network through this port without authentication When this field displays Force Unauthorized all subscribers are denied access to the network through this port Reauthentication This field displays whether On or not Off a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauthentication This field displays how often a subscriber has to re enter his or her username and password to T
105. 8 This command shows the line operating values ofa G SHDSL port An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt lineinfo 2 2 Down Sp 0 Tx 0 Tr 0 Rx 0 Rr 0 NM 0 T 000 00 00 where lt 2 Down gt The port number and whether the port is down up respectively lt Sp gt The line rate lt Tx gt The number of frames transmitted lt Tr gt The number of frames transmitted with errors lt Rx gt The number of frames received lt Rr gt The number of frames received with errors lt NM gt The noise margin in decibels lt T gt The uptime of a port in day hour minute format 25 3 7 Lineperf Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt lineperf lt port gt where lt port gt A port number from 1 to 8 This command shows the line performance counters of an G SHDSL port An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt lineperf 7 Port 7 Sp 2048kbps NM 0db ATTEN 0db ES 0 SES 0 LOSWS 0 UAS 0 downN 0 G SHDSL Commands 25 3 IES 1000 User s Guide where 25 3 8 Syntax where lt Port gt lt Sp gt lt NM gt lt ATTEN gt lt ES gt lt SES gt lt LOSWS gt lt UAS gt lt downN gt The port number on the SAM1008 The line rate If Sp 0 then the connection is down Noise Margin The noise margin in decibels Attenuation The loop attenuation in decibels Errored Second The total number of one second intervals when one or more CRC e
106. A e a a E E a a Ea a SA RESE 25 1 25 2 Configured Versus Actual Speed oooooconinonioninoninonconnconnononoconoconaconocnnn ei i e naco aii 25 1 2339 GS HD SE COMAS 1 AI ER A T ETE E Ea dd 25 1 Chapter 26 Virtual Channel ManageMent oocncocccnnacocinonononcno nono ncnn nono nc nn ocn nn nara nn nn n rn nn rn r nn rar nn rra nnnn rra 26 1 26 1 About Virtual Channels roerien eea a ea a E ea a e aaa 26 1 26 2 Virtual Channel Profile Commands sisust oiean Oia 26 1 20 3 PVC Channels a Ad a E aa Ee Ea e n rn 26 4 Chapter 27 10 100M Fast Ethernet Port COMMAandS ooooooccccccccncononononoccnncnnononcnnnnnonnnononnn conc nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninns 27 1 27 1 10 100M Fast Ethernet Overview ececcceceessesecesesseesecesecaeeeceesecaaeeneesecsaesaeseeceaecaecaeseneeaecaeeaeeeseeaeees 27 1 Table of Contents xi IES 1000 User s Guide 24 2 A E E 27 1 Ghapter28 Bridge Command aaru iaaea TEE NE ERNO EE EOAR EEE 28 1 28 1 Bridge Commands Overview ccsccescsesscessceeseeeseesseeeseeeseecseecsaecsaecaaecaecaecsaeesseeseeeseaeeeseeeseeeseesseeesaes 28 1 28 2 Bridge Port N UMbETS 3 25 cheeses A A aint dade wel ddeta A 28 1 28 3 Basics Gommmands A a iia 28 1 284 MAC Filter Commands in A Ai id 28 2 28 9 IS A sees tctad sot teleost a a a bleed e a s tah dyed a a a 28 3 28 6 Port Filter Commands Port Based VLAN ccccecssecsseesseesceesseessecsecnsecesecnseeneeeeeeseeeseseeeseeeaeecsaeesaes 28 5 28 7 Tagged Ethernet Fram
107. ADSL ports are disabled by default Check the ADSL line pin assignments shown in the Pin Assignments appendix Check the telephone wire connections between the ADSL modem router and the MDF s Check the telephone wire and connections between the MDF s and ADSL port s Check the telephone wire mapping on the MDF s Make sure the in house wiring works and is connected properly COIN OD oa BR Ww Make sure the upstream and downstream line rates are consistent between the IES 1000 side and the CPE Customer Premise Equipment side If your line quality is low you may need to select slower upstream and downstream line rates for both the IES 1000 and CPE sides Refer to the User s Guide 8 2 Hardware Troubleshooting IES 1000 User s Guide Table 8 4 ADSL LED Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 10 Repeat the steps above using a different ADSL port 8 5 The LAN LED s Do Not Turn On Table 8 5 LAN LED Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure the LAN port of your network module is connected to an Ethernet WAN switch with a straight through Category 5 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair cable with RJ 45 connectors 2 The factory default settings for the LAN Ethernet port of the network module are gt Speed Auto gt Duplex Auto gt Flow control Auto If the IES 1000 s auto negotiation is turned off an Ethernet port uses the pre configure
108. Add Delete Figure 16 2 SNMP Setup The following table describes this screen Table 16 2 SNMP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Trust Host The trusted host your IES 1000 will only respond to SNMP messages from this address If you leave the field set to 0 0 0 0 default your IES 1000 will respond to all SNMP messages it receives regardless of source Community This field displays the SNMP access entry s community password for the incoming requests from the management station Access Right This field displays None if this SNMP access entry does not allow incoming Get and GetNext or Set requests Read displays if the entry is read only allows incoming Get and GetNext requests Write displays if the entry is read write allows incoming Get GetNext and Set requests Send Trap This field displays whether Yes or not No this SNMP access entry allows traps to be sent to the SNMP manager Add Click this button to configure a new SNMP access entry Delete Select a SNMP access entry s s Delete check box and click the Delete button to remove the entry 16 2 1 Add SNMP Access Entry Screen Click an index number in the SNMP Setup screen to open this screen SNMP 16 3 IES 1000 User s Guide SNMP Access Entry Add SNMP Access Entry Trusted Host Community Access Right None Read Write Send Trap C Yes No Apply Reset Figure 16 3 Add SNMP Acc
109. Command 30 4 Saving Configuration 9 4 Real time Variable Bit Rate 13 4 13 7 Scalable 1 4 Regen Port Command 32 2 SCR 13 5 13 7 Related Documentation xxii Screen Overview 9 3 Relayinfo Add Command 29 4 Screws 4 2 Relayinfo Disable Command 29 3 Secured Host 1 3 23 4 Relayinfo Enable Command 29 3 Default 2 2 Relayinfo Status Command 29 4 Enable Disable 23 4 Remote Firmware Upload Wl Secured Host Add Command 23 4 Remote Management Pl Secured Host Command 23 4 Remote Side Port Bonding Command 25 13 Secured Host Commands 23 4 Removing and Installing A Fuse E Secured Host Delete Command 23 4 Removing and Installing Network Modules 5 1 Security 1 3 Removing Fuses C Self test 8 1 Before you Begin C Sansom G Opening the Fuse Housing C Set 16 2 Resource Management 13 4 Set Auto Command 27 1 Resource Management Cells S Set Central Side N wire Mode Command 25 10 Restart Command nl Set Central Side Port Bonding Command 25 12 RFC 1215 Se Set Channel Command 26 4 RFC 1483 el AALAN oir Set Chassis Command 23 3 RJ 11 Bee eee Set Contact Command 23 2 RJ 45 ds Set Duplex Command 27 1 RM is Set Location Command 23 3 Route Add Command 33 4 Set Mode Command 23 3 Route Delete Command 33 4 Set Name Command 23 2 Index 9 IES 1000 User s Guide Set Port Command 24 12 25 8 Speed 8 3 Set Ports Command 24 13 25 8 Speed Configuration 25 6 Set Profile Command 24 9 25 5 Stack 6 12 Set PVC Command 24 14 25 8 Statistics Command 33 3 Set PVCs Command 24 15 25 9
110. D Region Channels No DEFVAL 2304 192 Annex B 1 No DEFVAL 2304 192 Annex B 1 No DEFVAL 2304 192 Annex B 1 No DEFYAL 2304 192 Annex B 1 No DEFVAL 2304 192 Annex B 1 No DEFVAL 2304 192 Annex B 1 No DEFVAL 2304 192 Annex B 1 No DEFYAL 2304 192 Annex B 1 N wire Group Mode Group Number Bundled Ports Delete Name Group A 4 wire STU C 2 3 4 m Group B 4 wire STU C 1 1 2 r Add Delete Bonding Name Mode Member List Delete Bond 1 4 wire STU C group 1 2 a Bond 2 2 wire STU C port 6 8 a Add Delete Figure 12 2 G SHDSL Port Setup The following table describes this screen Table 12 2 G SHDSL Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Setup Click this link to go to a screen for setting up DSL profiles Port Number This field shows 0 for the Ethernet port Active This field shows whether or not this port is enabled the Ethernet port is always enabled Auto Neg This field shows whether auto negotiation is turned on Yes or not No The Speed and Duplex fields display N A when the auto negotiation is turned on Speed This is the speed of the Ethernet connection Duplex The duplex mode can be half meaning traffic is transmitted in one direction at a time or full meaning traffic is simultaneously transmitted in both directions Port Number This field identifies the port s index number 12 4 G SHDSL Module Port Setup IES 1000 User s Guide Table 12 2 G SHDSL Po
111. Density region annex A or annex B region State Displays whether the G SHDSL port is enabled or disabled and the G SHDSL line s operational state If this parameter is disabled then the G SHDSL port and line is forced down If this parameter is enabled then the G SHDSL port and line may be up or down The operational state is either Up for a port that has a connection or Down for a port that does not have a connection 25 3 9 List Ports Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt list ports This command shows the configured minimum speeds if applicable maximum speeds mode n wire bonded or normal Power Spectral Density region and states of all G SHDSL ports 25 3 10 Set Profile Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set profile lt profile name gt lt Cmax gt lt Cmin gt annexA annexB where lt profile name gt The name of the profile up to 18 characters except DEFVAL lt Cmax gt The maximum transmission rate in Kbps G SHDSL Commands 25 5 IES 1000 User s Guide lt Cmin gt The minimum transmission rate in Kbps This setting is optional 192 Kbps is the default if you do not configure a value for this parameter Setting Cmax and Cmin to the same rate fixes the rate for that port annexA annexB The Power Spectral Density region omitted for annexB Configure lt Cmax gt and lt Cmin gt parameters between 192 and 2304 Kbps Speed Configuration Even though you ca
112. E NEn A aE aTi 9 3 Table 10 1 General Setup unica A A di atada te 10 1 Table 10 2 Bridge SUP A AA EN eed 10 3 Table 10 3 Bridge Packet Type Filter SetuP oooonnicccnnnnncccnnnnoccccnnnoncccnnnorcccnn noc cnn rn cnn narrar 10 4 Table 10 4 Bridge Port Filter Setup echa ctetecte cs RAE EE EARE EE AA AAA E Aaa alan cad 10 6 Table 10 5 Edit Bridge Port Filter Setup is c i ccescectisanieecetncgedecontddacdupeseatensubenae E ERE AAKER AE EAR TRAA ER EnA aA 10 7 Table 10 6 Bridge MAC Filter Setup ocomiiciioniniiaco nd dd dd Dd 10 8 Table 10 7 Bndes MAG Filter Entry Listesinin aei a EEE dia ARE E EA EAER 10 9 Table 10 8 Bridge MAG Filter Entry Add oarenien E E EEE aE 10 9 Table 10 9 MAC Count Filter Setup re orraa eerren eA O Aa e EEA aa Aaaa AREE lra 10 10 Table 10 10 MAC Count Filter Edit ooooooocccnnccninncconoccconocononcccoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nano nan n cnn nn ran rra nr ren rca nn naar rn nan nnnnnnnnns 10 11 Table 10 11 Bridge MAC Address ReCoOrO ococococonnococicoconoccnnnononcnn nono ncnn ono n ocn n nro rca nn nn rra rn nn narrar anna rra 10 13 Table 10 12 Bridge IGMP Snooping Record 00 0 eee eee ee eeee erence ee eeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeseeiaeeeeeneeeesenaees 10 14 Table 10 13 DHCP Relay Setup ii A Adhd 10 16 Table 10 14 Add DHCP Servera coioicins dit a i aai a Aarra 10 17 Table 10 15 802 1X SUP om AA A IA aa 10 18 Table 10 16 RADIUS Server SetUP oooooocccccncccccoconoooccccnccnnnnnnnononncn eeeeeeeaaaaeaececeeeecqa
113. EL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 5 3 MAC Count Filter Setup Screen Click MAC Count Filter in the Bridge Setup screen to open this screen Use this screen to limit the number of MAC addresses that may be dynamically learned or statically configured on a DSL port MAC Count Filter Setup Port Number Filtering Enable Max Dynamic MAC Count Max Static MAC Count 0 0 ovo 0 0 0 0 070 070 010 wo wo Figure 10 10 MAC Count Filter Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 9 MAC Count Filter Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen Port Number This field displays a DSL port number Click an entry to go to a screen to edit the number of MAC addresses that may be learned on that port Filtering Enable This field tells whether or not MAC address count filtering has been enabled for that port Max Dynamic This field s first number displays how many dynamically learned MAC addresses are recorded MAC Count for a port This field s second number displays the limit of how many MAC addresses
114. ID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 15 3 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the switch is capable of receiving tagged or untagged frames You can configure a network module to receive only tagged or all frames on a port by port basis If it is set to tagged only on a port then only tagged frames are allowed to enter from that port and untagged frames are dropped if set to all then both tagged and untagged frames are allowed to enter the switch The network module does not alter the VID of a frame if it is already tagged however when an untagged frame enters the switch it is assigned the default port VID PVID of the ingress incoming port Thus a frame always has a VID inside the switch regardless of whether it is tagged or not on the wire The default PVID is 1 for all ports but this can be changed The egress outgoing port s of a frame is determined on the combination of the destination MAC address and the VID of the frame For a unicast frame the egress port based by the destination address must be a member of the VID also otherwise the frame is blocked For a broadcast or multicast without IGMP snooping frame it is duplicated only on ports except the ingress port itself that are members of the VID thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain Whether to tag an outgoing frame depends on the setting of the egress
115. IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 31 1 IES 1000 User s Guide Example 1 192 168 1 1 gt vlanlg 2 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan setentry 11 2 fixed untag 3 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan setentry 11 1 fixed tag 4 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt pvid 2 11 5 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt svlan setentry 12 3 fixed untag 6 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan setentry 12 1 fixed tag 7A 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt pvid 3 12 8 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan setentry 13 4 fixed untag 9 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan setentry 13 1 fixed tag 10 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt pvid 4 13 11 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan setentry 14 5 fixed untag 12 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan setentry 14 1 fixed tag 13 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt pvid 5 14 14 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan setentry 15 6 fixed untag 15 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan setentry 15 1 fixed tag 16 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt pvid 6 15 17 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt svlan setentry 18 9 fixed untag 18 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt svlan setentry 18 1 fixed tag 19 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt pvid 9 18 Step 2 Configure your management VLAN e Usethe svlan setentry command to configure a VLAN ID for your device the management or CPU VLAN e Usethesvlan cpu command to register your device as a member of the management VLAN Example 1 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan setentry 2 1 fixed tag 2 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan cpu 2 Step 2 Perform the procedure below to complete the VLAN setup after you have configured all the netw
116. IES 1000 Integrated Ethernet Switch Version 2 05 11 2005 User s Guide YA Networking Power IES 1000 User s Guide Copyright Copyright 2005 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks Trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners ji Copyright IES 1000 User s Guide Interference Statements and Warnings FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interfere
117. IES 1000 User s Guide Spain support zyxel es 34 902 195 420 www zyxel es ZyXEL Communications Alejandro Villegas 33 sales zyxel es 34 913 005 345 1 28043 Madrid Spain Sweden support zyxel se 46 31 744 7700 www zyxel se ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg sales zyxel se 46 31 744 7701 Sweden Ukraine support ua zyxel com 380 44 247 69 78 www ua zyxel com ZyXEL Ukraine13 Pimonenko Str Kiev 04050 sales ua zyxel com 380 44 494 49 32 Ukraine United support zyxel co uk 44 1344 303044 www zyxel co uk ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Kingdom 08707 555779 UK Courtyard only sales zyxel co uk 44 1344 303034 ftp zyxel co uk Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK vi Warranty IES 1000 User s Guide Table of Contents COPY Mii tl T E A E E E A A pete E ma ii Interference Statements and Warnings ooooccocnnncccinnnacocinnnononcnonnnnn cnn nono cnn ancora rro nn iii ZYXEL Limited WAID ae R EE REER AAEE seceis AAE EEE ETER ed eaten nied iv Customer SUPPORT dE daa et v Listo FIgUreS ct E xiv Listof Tables cui EA A a E Aa een tio xix Prodo 23 nike ran Stetina mates Heed tice ania E ected eed eee eal eo arta xxii Overview and installati n ni s enaena e aara anaana rrna re l Chapter 1 Getting to Know the IES 1000 0ooooocccccnnococccnnoncccnnnonononononn nn nono i aA E NE 1 1 1 1 FEATS trate loros Rea tancia lia ea l
118. IP addresses of the DHCP servers to which the Integrated Ethernet Switch address should relay DHCP client TCP IP configuration requests Add Click this button to go to a screen where you can configure an IP address of a DHCP server to which the Integrated Ethernet Switch should relay DHCP client TCP IP configuration requests Delete Select an address s Delete check box and click the Delete button to remove the DHCP server Add DHCP Server Screen Click DHCP Relay in the Bridge Setup screen to open the DHCP Relay screen Click Add in the DHCP Relay screen to open this screen 10 16 Getting Started Screens IES 1000 User s Guide Add DHCP server IP Address Apply Reset Figure 10 16 Add DHCP Server Table 10 14 Add DHCP Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen DHCP Relay Click this link to go to the DHCP Relay Setup screen Setup IP Address Type the IP address of the DHCP server to which the Integrated Ethernet Switch should relay DHCP client TCP IP configuration requests Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afre
119. L ports one through four could be set to be STU C while G SHDSL ports five through eight are set to be STU R The following example sets an STU C port bonding group named c1 for ports 2 4 and 8 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set bondc cl 2 4 8 Make sure you set all of the bonded ports to have the same PVID see section 31 3 3 PVID Command If the ports are enabled and you change them from central side to remote side or vice versa all ports are set to the central side by default the system will take a few moments to process the change If the ports are not enabled the processing occurs when you enable them During this processing the system appears to be hanging 25 3 25 Set Remote Side Port Bonding Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set bondr lt bond name gt lt port list gt or 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set bondr lt mode gt lt bond name gt lt group list gt where lt bond name gt The name of the bonding group up to 31 characters lt port list gt Two to eight G SHDSL ports lt mode gt Type 4w to bond 4 wire two port n wire groups together Type 8w to bond 8 wire four port n wire groups together You must use the set nwirer command to configure the 4 or 8 wire bundled groups before you can use this command to bond them lt group list gt When you select 4 wire or 8 wire mode list the member groups for this port bonding group You must have already used the set nwirer command to configure th
120. List Command Display Forwarding Process Example The switch uses the SVLAN in making frame forwarding decisions First the switch checks the MAC address in a frames header against the MAC filtering database Next the switch checks the VLAN ID VID of tagged frames or assigns temporary VIDs to untagged frames see the PVID Command The switch then checks the VID in a frame s tag against the SVLAN table The switch notes what the SVLAN table says that is the SVLAN tells the switch whether or not to forward a frame and if the forwarded frames should have tags Then the switch applies the port filter to finish the forwarding decision This means that frames may be dropped even if the SVLAN says to forward them Frames might also be dropped if they are sent to a CPE customer premises equipment DSL device that does not accept tagged frames The following figure shows the flow of the decision process used with a broadcast frame one that is meant to go to all of the ports 31 6 IEEE 802 1QTagged VLAN Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Incorning traffic from LAN Frame wio tag port pvid vid port ad_cntl tag_cntl 1 fixed untag fixed untag fixed untag forbidden untag fixed untag normal untag fixed tag fixed untag CPU joins in VLAN 1 Port filter in bridge Frame with tag vid 1 own m wa fw bw Packet w o tag to DSL port Packet w o tag to DSL port2 Packet w o tag to DSL port3 No packet to DSL po
121. MILEDIS Oh a ai ica 8 1 8 3 The SHDSL LED s Do Not Turn Ofte ccc cccccccccseesceeseeeseeeeecssecaecesecesecseeeeeeseeeseaeeeseeeseesaeecsaeenaenes 8 2 8 4 The ADSL LEDES Do Not TUTO it a aah tii 8 2 80 The EAN LEDs Do Not Tun On ida ia oes A ta a ai ea hake 8 3 8 6 There Is No Voice on an ADSL ComMectiOM cccoconconnnnocononinnconnnononnnnnncononncnnnnnncn nc nn nn 8 3 IS NO 8 3 Getting a a ad dude tecees ys 111 Chapter 9 Web Configurator Access and Navigation ooooocccinnoncccnnnocccccononcncnnnoncncnnnnn cnn c cano nn r cano rn 9 1 9 1 Web Configurator Overview cccccccccssccessceteceneceseceecseeceseecseecsaecssecsaecesecsaecsseeseeeseaeeeeeeeaeeeseeesseneenaeeaas 9 1 9 2 Accessing the Web Configurator cccccccssccsseceseceseceseceeseeeeceseeesseeeseeeseecssecsaeceseseeeseseceseeeseeeeeceesaeenes 9 1 9 3 Home Seres tetera le aii ah leat Ae ie a 9 2 9 4 Sor e OVA aueaecd vlad dus AA AAA iaa 9 3 9 5 Saving Your Configurations asenne e a a aa a A a a e E A S a 9 4 9 6 Navigating the Web Configurator ooooonccninccnonononcooncnnncnononanonnn nono an a ea a aa E s 9 4 G hapter 10 Getmg Started Screen aeaaea a e A bea da A dada TR 10 1 10 Getting Started OVIVIS Witt A vedi a did 10 1 10 2 General Setup creencia blanca narnia 10 1 viii Table of Contents IES 1000 User s Guide 10 3 RR EEN 10 2 10 4 Bridge Setup TEN A ad A e ea 10 2 10 5 Port Filter Portibased VEAN cinc ita At da cti 10 5 10 67 TAS Up
122. P Snooping Click this link to show received multicast membership information for each port Record DHCP Relay Click this link to go to a screen where you can configure DHCP relay settings 802 1X Click this link to go to a screen where you can configure for IEEE 802 1X authentication Fast Mode Setting Fast Mode VLAN ID Click this link to go to a screen for editing each port s VLAN ID only in Fast Mode 10 4 1 Packet Type Filter Setup Screen Click Packet Type Filter in the Bridge Setup screen to open this screen Bridge Packet Type Filter Setup Port Number Packet Filter Type E 1 o 3 o 5 o 3 Q 3 a 4 Apply Reset Figure 10 3 Bridge Packet Type Filter Setup The following table describes this screen Table 10 3 Bridge Packet Type Filter Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen Port Number This field identifies the individual ports 10 4 Getting Started Screens IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 3 Bridge Packet Type Filter Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Packet Filter Type Choose Any or IP or PPPoE from the drop down list Choose Any to allow all kinds of packets IP to allow IP packets only or PPPoE to allow PPPoE packets only Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation
123. Prolo UP dd lea te be 11 5 Figure 11 3 ADSL Add ProfilO coi iia toas 11 6 Figure 11 4 Ethernet Porn Sepia Aaa 11 8 Figure 11 5 ADSL Port Setup Edeno ra A A AR A a AAT AA a 11 10 Figure 12 1 N wire Mode with Port Bonding Example oooooconnnnccccnnnococcnonononcno nono nncnn nono nan nnnnn cnn nro nn rrnnn rra rnnr rra 12 2 Figure 12 26 SHDSL Port Sol en a rs 12 4 List of Figures XV IES 1000 User s Guide Figure 1 2 3 G SHDSL Profile Setup aerie eaa AP aaa LARREEN dd ac 12 6 Figure 12 4 G SHDSL Add Profile ooooooooccononcconncccnocccoconcconocononccnnnnncnnnnccnnn nc cnn n cnn nn nn narran nn nr nr n rra rca nn nn anna aran nn nannncns 12 7 Elgure1 2 5 G SHDSL Port Setup ui dei ede iei i toei ieee dade 12 8 Figure 12 6 Add G SHDSL N Wire Group o oo enea E AEE EARE A ET AEAEE ARAETA EEEE NERES 12 9 Figure 12 7 Add G SHDSL Port Bond ena ais 12 11 Figure 13 1 DSL Port Channel Setup iii dvd cada 13 2 Figure 13 2 PCR SCR MCR and MBS in Traffic ShapinQ oooooccccnccccocononoccnonononanononnnnncnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnannn me nsee nenna 13 5 Figure 13 3 TAT CDVT and BT in Traffic Shaping oooonnnccnnnnnnicinnnacocinnnononnnn conc cnn o nonn cnn rro nn rn rn rra rra 13 6 Figure 13 4 DSL Port VC Profile Setup oo noocconnnnicinnnnccconnnnocccnnnnonaccnnnnno cnn n nono nn r nn nn rana nr nn 13 7 Figure 13 5 DSL Port VC Profile Add cocoa retiasia 13 8 Figure 13 6 DSL Port Channel Add cout id italianas 13 10 Figure 14
124. S Annex A and the AAM 1008 63 is for ADSL over ISDN Annex B Differentiation is made where needed gt The SAM1008 G SHDSL Access Module may be referred to as the SAM the SHDSL module the DSL module or the module Related Documentation gt Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide contains general initial configuration instructions gt The AAM 1212 51 53 User s Guide gt Glossary and ZyXEL Web Site xxii Preface IES 1000 User s Guide Please refer to www zyxel com for an online glossary of networking terms or the ZyXEL download library for additional support documentation Online Registration Register your product online at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products General Syntax Conventions gt Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma For example click Start Settings Control Panel Network means first you click Start click or move the mouse pointer over Settings then click or move the mouse pointer over Control Panel and finally click or double click Network gt Enter means for you to type one or more characters Select or Choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices Predefined choices are in Bold Arial font Button and field labels links and screen names in are in Bold Times New Roman font A single keystroke is in Arial font and enclosed in square brackets ENTER means the Enter or carriage return k
125. S 1000 User s Guide List of Tables Table 3 1 Front Panel Ports of the SAM1008 Network Module 0 cc ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee settee eeeeaeeeeesnaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 3 2 Table 3 2 Front Panel Ports of the AAM1008 Network MOdule cccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeesnaeeeeenseeeeenaas 3 2 Table 3 3 Front Panel Ports of the IES 1000 00 0 E N eee nett eet EE E AEE A AEAEE 3 2 Table 7 1 Network Module LED DeSCriptionS cceccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeneae cece ee eeeeceaeaeeeeeeeeeesecsacaeceeeeeseseneeeeeeeeeeetenees 7 2 Table 8 1 SYS LED Troubleshooting occconoccccnnnocccccnnoncccnononcccnn eerie cc nano nr cnn nan AAA r rr rn nan A A 8 1 table 8 2 AEM LED Troubleshootind ii ri 8 1 Table 8 3 SHDSL LED Troubleshooting ooccccnnoncccnnnocccccononcncnononcnnnnnn nc cc nono n cnc naar nn cr eee ee erties ee nn nar rra Andaa addaa aaen 8 2 Table 8 4 ADSL LED Troubleshooting cooooocccnnnonccocnnnocccccononcncnononcncnnnoncncnn nan nn ee eee ee een nn rn een nn rn nn nan n AAAA Andaa aaa 8 2 Table 8 5 LAN LED TroubleShOOting es ticos ida seu tdeedbagaceed baranda cala AA 8 3 Table 8 6 ADSL Voice TroubleShooting ass aeara rt ine eee eee nn cn naar nn nr nn KRAE ARREA ee nn SAA AEEA REE a 8 3 Table 8 7 Testing In house Wiring rrenen a da 8 4 Taide 9 1 Navigation P anel Links er anA NEATE ERE ta ER O 9 2 Table 9 2 Web Configurator Screens 00 0 cect entree ene non n nn eee eee EE TEENETE ENEA e a
126. SL Profile Setup Profile Name Delete DEFVAL Max Rate Kbps 2304 Min Rate Kbps 192 PSD Region Annex B Add Delete Figure 12 3 G SHDSL Profile Setup Table 12 3 G SHDSL Profile Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Setup Click this link to go to the Port Setup screen Profile Name These are the names of individual profiles The DEFVAL profile always exists and all of the DSL ports have it assigned to them by default Click a profile s name to go to a screen where you can edit the profile Max Rate Kbps This is the maximum transfer rate in kilobits per second Kbps configured for the ports that use this profile Min Rate Kbps This is the minimum transfer rate in kilobits per second Kbps configured for the ports that use this profile PSD Region This field shows the Power Spectral Density PSD region that is configured for this profile Annex A or Annex B Add Click this button to configure a new profile Delete Select a profile s Delete check box and click the Delete button to remove the profile G SHDSL Profile Add or Edit Screen Click the Profile Setup link in the Port Setup screen to go to the Profile Setup screen Click the Add button in the Profile Setup screen to add a new profile or click the name of an existing profile to edit the profile 12 6 G SHDSL Module Port Setup IES 1000 User s Guide Add GSHDSL Profile Profile Name
127. These RJ 11 ports labeled 1 8 connect to subscriber ADSL equipment CO 1 8 These RJ 11 ports labeled 1 8 connect to CO central office equipment CONSOLE The CONSOLE port is an RJ 11 port used for configuring the IES 1000 This port connects to a local computer Table 3 3 Front Panel Ports of the IES 1000 PORT DESCRIPTION POWER Refer to the Hardware Specifications appendix for power connection specifications 3 2 Hardware Overview IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 4 Hardware Installation This chapter shows you how to install hardware for a freestanding or rack mounted scenario 4 1 Environment The following are the recommended environments for the IES 1000 4 1 1 Operating Environment Temperature 0 50 C Humidity 5 95 non condensing 4 1 2 Storage Environment Temperature 25 70 C Humidity 5 95 non condensing Refer also to the Hardware Specifications Appendix 4 2 Freestanding IES 1000 Installation Requirements Position the IES 1000 on a flat surface Remember that the unit requires proper ventilation 4 3 Rack mounted IES 1000 Installation Requirements e Two mounting brackets supplied e Eight M3 flat head screws supplied and a 2 Philips screwdriver e Four M5 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver 4 4 Mounting the IES 1000 on a Rack Precautions e Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains e Make sure
128. VC profiles except the DEFVAL profile show profile lt profile gt Shows the contents of the specified profile profiles Shows the contents of all profiles pvc lt portNo gt Shows the PVC configuration of the specified GSHDSL ports pvcs Shows the PVC configuration of all GSHDSL ports ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Shows the contents of the specified PVC channel Commands Introduction 22 13 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION chs lt start port gt lt stop Shows the contents of all PVC port gt channels in all ports or in the specified ports vcp lt profile name gt Shows the contents of the specific VC profile veps Shows the contents of all VC profiles list port lt portNo gt Shows the setting and status of the specified GSHDSL port ports Shows the setting and status for all G SHDSL ports profiles Shows the contents of all profiles and profiles applied to all G SHDSL ports bond Shows all bonding groups nwire Shows all n wire groups setname lt port number gt lt port name gt Sets the name of a G SHDSL port getname lt port number gt Displays the name of a G SHDSL port getnames Displays the names of all G SHDSL ports monitor Shows port statistics of all GSHDSL ports lt startPort gt Shows port statistics of GSHDSL ports from
129. VLAN page Egress Port Ports that have been added to this VLAN are listed here in numerical order Untagged Port Untagged ports that have been added to this VLAN are listed here in numerical order Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the switch dynamically using GVRP or statically that is added as a permanent entry Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Set Interval You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling Previous Page Click Previous Page to show the preceding screen of VLAN status information if there is more than one screen of VLAN statistics Next Page Click Next Page to show the subsequent screen of VLAN status information if there is more than one screen of VLAN statistics 19 6 Statistics IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 20 Diagnostic This chapter explains the Advanced Management Diagnostic screens 20 1 Diagnostic Overview The IES 1000 provides diagnostic screens to aid in troubleshooting 20 2 Diagnostic Screen Click Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open th
130. VPI 0 VCI 33 Enable Disable State Disabled Operational Mode auto Profile DEFVAL gt Maximum Upstream Rate 512 Kbps gt Maximum Downstream Rate 2048 Kbps Ethernet Port Auto negotiation ON Speed used with auto negotiation OFF 100Mbps Duplex mode used with auto negotiation OFF half duplex Other Factory Defaults MAC filter Disabled MAC count filter Disabled Secured Host Disabled Sys Error Log Always Enabled UNIX Syslog Disabled IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Disabled IGMP Snooping Enabled Unknown flood DHCP Relay Disabled IEEE 802 1X Port based Authentication Disabled 2 2 Factory Default Settings IES 1000 User s Guide Factory Default Settings 2 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview This chapter gives a brief introduction to the IES 1000 hardware 3 1 Additional Installation Requirements A computer with Ethernet 10Base T or 100Base TX NIC Network Interface Card e WAN service provided by a local phone company A computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control 3 2 AC Power Front Panel The following figure shows the front panel of the AC power version of the IES 1000 with a SAM1008 network module installed on the left and an AAM1008 network module on the right ZyXEL iF Express om far 1 z f m ORNE de 2 EN
131. a N a a a tie ao eds 37 2 AAA 37 3 RR 37 3 IWS E O ES RUE 37 4 A NO 37 4 A RR NO 37 4 37 11 A E TA 37 5 Appendices and IndeX cicicninionnsiaa ic ic ii ii ATRAER VI Appendix A Safety WarmingS seiis iriri dd gee binned ae ina td A Appendix B Removing and Installing a FUSE essiccare E a EAER C Appendix C Pin Assignment nica a id ia E Appendix D Hardware Specifications ooooooooccccnnnnincococcconcnccnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnn nn cenar nn nn rn nn nn anar E nn nn rn nr rn TAEA ETna G Md A E A A E ree Table of Contents xiii IES 1000 User s Guide List of Figures Figtire 11 MiTULAp plication trates a dada 1 5 Figure 1 2 Central Office or ISP Application 0 cccccceececeecneceeeeeeeeeecceaeeeeeeeeeseceeaaeceeeeeeeesecenaeaeeeeeeseccaceeeeeeeeertees 1 6 Elgure 3 1 AC Power Eront Panel ile 3 1 Figure 3 2 D Power Front Pano osaa in E o 3 1 Figure 4 1 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the IES 1000 oooonccccinnocccccnnoccccnononcncnononcnnnnnonnncnnnnnncn cnn ncc nana nncnnnnns 4 2 Figure 4 2 Mounting the IES 1000 on a Rack eccrine ee etn e einer eee ee ernie ee ee nn nn cc naar nn cnn nan nn nr naar nncn naar nnnnnnnns 4 3 Figure 5 1 IES 1000 G SSHDSL SAM1008 Network Module oooooocccooccconocccoccccconccnconcnonococonnnnnnn rn nnnn cnn r nn rra 5 1 Figure 5 2 Loosen Module ScreWS oocoooonoccccnnnoccccnononcconnnono cinco non rc cnnn arrancar 5 1 Figure 5 3 Removing a Network Module from the IES
132. a ea a a a E ee a a a a era a d aa 13 7 Table 13 3 DSL Port VC Profile Add a a aaa aAa a aea Aaaa Aa DD aa A a aa N aaa 13 8 Table 13 4 DSL Port Channel Add cccccceeeceeeecceceeeceeeaeceeeeeceaeeeecaaeceeeecaeeecaaeeecaaeseaeeeesaeeseaeeseaeeseueeesseeeseneeseas 13 10 Table 14 1 Static Route Setup secs seek esini ee aa a ea aiaa a e a a dd 14 1 Table 14 2 Add StaticiROute aaa a a E A E A E ENS 14 2 Tablo 15 1 GARP Terminology di A AARS AA aS 15 3 Table 15 2 Static VLAN Setup cs ia rod iia e idad ida aA 15 4 Table 15 3 Add VLAN Static Entry A 15 6 Table 16241 SNMP sivas cedtivens nae a cei eee lad te eee ae 16 2 Table 16 2 SNMP Setup cca ci aint anti A A tl aed eel een 16 3 Table 16 3 Add SNMP Access Entry wich eicahilien a salient elas 16 4 Table 171 LOGINS tarts feces nite eat ea ee tie ee tibet ete i eee 17 1 Table 18A Maintenance a sect diets niet eich ith eb tied ee ee ee a tit 18 1 Table 18 2 Secured Client S tup ccecescccccceceeeeeceeeeaece cece eee seceaaaeaeeeeeeesageaaaeeeceeeeeeceseaaacaeceseeseneeeaeeeeeeeeesessenaeees 18 2 Table 18 3 Add Secured Chente 2 005 evidenced OA Aia idad 18 3 Table 19 4 Stat unicidad bhigeuehirteeeeslitions 19 1 XX List of Tables IES 1000 User s Guide Table 19 2 Hardware Monto A A A A A et eee 19 2 Table 193 Port Statistics 19 3 Table 19 4 Channel Statistics ccoo tdt dd ld ld dd odes 19 5 Table 19 5 VEAN SAtUS Si A A A E tad 19 6 Table 20 1 DIAGNOSIS
133. a problem with the telephone wiring If the port s DSL LED turns on use the 1ineperf command refer to section 25 3 7 again to determine the port s transmission rate If the port s actual transmission rate not just the configured transmission rate does not come within 640 Kbps of the fastest transmission rate of the members of the port bonding group you recorded this in step 2 the quality of the line may be too low 37 6 Configured Settings The network module s configured settings do not take effect at restart Table 37 6 Troubleshooting the Network Module s Configured Settings CORRECTIVE ACTION After you finish configuring the settings remember to use the config save command to save your settings to the network module If this does not work contact the distributor 37 1 Password I forgot the password to my network module Troubleshooting 37 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 37 7 Troubleshooting the Password CORRECTIVE ACTION Refer to section 36 2 to update your firmware All settings will return to default values so any configurations you have made will be lost 37 8 Local Server The computer behind a DSL modem or router cannot access a local server connected to the IES 1000 Table 37 8 Troubleshooting a Local Server STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Refer to section 37 2 to make sure that the subscriber is able to transmit to the IES 1000
134. ad 29 2 Figure 31 1 Example PVID Command Display ooonocccocnnnnccinonnccccnnnnonancnn nono cnn nono canon narrar narrar rra 31 4 Figure 31 2 Example SVLAN List Command DisplaY ooooooconnnnniccnonnococinonoconnnonnno nano nnno nan r nano cnn rro rca rra rra 31 5 Figure 31 3 Example SVLAN List Command DisplaY ooooococnnnnccccnnnococanonaconcnnnnnoncnnnnno nn nr nnnn narran nn rr nr rra 31 6 Figure 314 S VEAN Example cicle 31 7 Figure 31 5 Example Svlan Getentry 2 Command Display ooooococnnincccnnnnococnnonoconnnnnononcn crono cnn ono nar r naar rca 31 8 Figure 31 6 Example DVLAN List Command Display oooooococnnncccccnnnococinonononcnn nono nano nnno carr nnnn nn r nan n rra r rana nr 31 9 Figure 31 7 Example DVLAN Getentry 2 Command Display oooooncoconinnccocnnnoconnnonono nano nono nan crono nn rro rca nnn nan 31 9 Figure 31 8 Example VLAN List Command Display eroriren a a nano nc nc nnno nn rca EAREN rra rra 31 10 List of Figures xvii IES 1000 User s Guide Figure 33 1 Setting IP Address and Default GatewaY oooocinnnnccnnnnnccccnnnoccccnnnoncccnn nr n cnn nn rca rr 33 2 Figure 36 1 BOOTP TETP Server ii aaaea a aaea dai aio taz 36 3 Figure 36 2 Input MAC ci a a 36 3 Figure 36 3 Database Edit Dialog 3 20 5 ities irae aaa tn EEA AE aE aE A aE EE aa EEan 36 4 Figure 36 4 Enable BOOTP TETP ii E a N he A teed 36 4 Figu re 36 5 Enter Debug Mod in diodiitiia a a a ive A et ee 36 4 xviii List of Figures IE
135. ady or has a malfunction SHDSL 1 8 Green On The DSL link is up or ADSL 1 8 Off The DSL link is down LAN Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is down Yellow Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is down 7 2 Turning On the IES 1000 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 8 Hardware Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to troubleshoot IES 1000 hardware 8 1 System Startup When you turn on the IES 1000 it automatically runs a self test that takes approximately 20 seconds The SYS LED will remain on if your IES 1000 has started normally 8 1 1 The SYS LED Does Not Turn On Table 8 1 SYS LED Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 With the AC power model make sure the power cord is properly connecting the IES 1000 s power socket to an appropriate power outlet Refer to the Hardware Specifications appendix to make sure you are using the correct power source With the DC power model make sure the power wires are properly connecting the IES 1000 s power terminal to an appropriate power supply and the power supply is operating normally Refer to the Hardware Specifications appendix to make sure you ar
136. aeaeceeeeeeeseesaaaaeeeeeesesessiceeeeeeeeess 10 19 Table 10 17 Edit 802 1x Seti eile anvil ab dag a el ee eda ional eee 10 20 List of Tables xix IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 18 Bridge Fast Mode VLAN ID Setup eee ei nr inner ine eens naar nnnc nano nn nn cnnnn nn rn naar cnc naar anccnnnns 10 21 aelel ea Ohe M aTe o EEEE tds 10 22 Table 11 1 Maximum Transfer Rates of the ADSL Ports ooocconnnncccnnnnococcnononccccononcncnnnoncncnnnnnnnnrnnnn rra rro rca rn 11 1 Table 112 ADSL Port SEU A A A e ee od dt 11 4 Table 1 13 ADSL Protile Setup do 11 5 Table 11 4 ADSLAdd Profile ico ii Sit A tent pe a dpe ee 11 6 Table 11 5 Ethernet Port Setup aa eT a a a aAa a e R T aaa 11 8 Table 11 6 ADSL Port Setup Edit fu tiene i aa aa eda eed ede 11 10 Table 12 1 Data Rates of the SAM1008 s SHDSL Potts oooocccinoccccnonociccccnnoncnccanoncnc nano ncnc cano nc nr canon narran rca rr rn rra 12 1 Table 12 2 6 SHDSL Pont Selena ias 12 4 Table 12 3 G SHDSL Profile Setup tits dad ad t s abad 12 6 Table 124 G SHDSE Add Profile iecirkni ld e edad eee 12 7 Table 12 5 GSHDSL Port Set a a a cnn 12 8 Table 12 6 Add GSHDSL N Wire Group cccccceceeeeecceceeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeaeceeeeesesecceaeeeeeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeeeteesnsanees 12 10 Table 12 7 Add G SHDSL Port Bonding iss access eee di ia Diener ates ae 12 11 Table 13 1 DSL Port Channe l Setup iii ve a ae dna A epee diva ndede 13 2 Table 13 2 DSL Port VC Profile Setup risna
137. alm User Name admin Password uen Cancel Figure 9 1 Password Screen Step 4 Click OK The home page of the web configurator displays Web Configurator Access and Navigation 9 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 9 3 Home Screen This is the web configurator home screen Click a link on the navigation panel to go to the corresponding screen Site Map Getting Started Pi n Bnage Setup IP Setup Port Setup Advanced Apphcations Static Route Setup E e VLAN Setup Navigation Panel Advanced Management Figure 9 2 Home Screen Table 9 1 Navigation Panel Links LABEL DESCRIPTION Getting Started General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general information about your device Bridge Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up and configure your device s bridging and filtering features IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure your device s IP address information Port Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure settings for the individual ports on your device Advanced Applications Static Route Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static routes for the device VLAN Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VLANs for your device Advanced Management SNMP This link takes you to a screen where you can set up SNMP related parameters Login
138. ame gt Deletes a subnet flush Removes all subnets version Shows the version information for the IP module isfs trace Shows the ISFS trace level lt level gt Sets the ISFS trace level version Shows version information for the ISFS module passwd Changes the management password restart Saves the configuration and restarts the system snmp access lt read write gt lt community gt Adds an SNMP access entry lt ip gt delete lt community gt lt ip gt Deletes an SNMP access entry flush Deletes all SNMP access entries list Lists all SNMP access entries trap add lt community gt lt ip gt Adds a trap destination delete lt community gt lt ip gt Deletes a trap destination flush Deletes all trap destinations list Lists all trap destinations config save Saves access entries and trap destinations to the nonvolatile memory sys info Shows the system information set name lt name gt Sets or clears the system name contact lt name gt Sets the contact person s name chassis lt id gt Sets the chassis ID number location lt loc gt Sets or clears the location mode lt fast normal gt Sets the bridge operation mode slot lt id gt Sets the slot ID errlog clear Clears the system error log display Shows the system error log syslog Shows the syslog setting enable disable Enables or disables the syslog 22 16 Commands Introduction IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands
139. ance if you specify 60 Kbps for a port the actual rate for that port will not exceed 32 Kbps and if you specify 66 Kbps the actual rate will not be over 64Kbps An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set profile debug 800 8000 This command sets the maximum upstream transmission rate to 800 kbps and the maximum downstream transmission rate to 8000 kbps None of the other settings are changed The following example creates a premium profile named gold for providing subscribers with very high connection speeds and no interleave delay It also sets the upstream target signal noise margin to 5 db the upstream minimum acceptable signal noise margin to 0 db the upstream maximum acceptable signal noise margin to 30 db the upstream minimum ADSL transmission rate to 64 Kbps the downstream target signal noise margin to 6 db the downstream minimum acceptable signal noise margin to 0 db the downstream maximum acceptable signal noise margin to 31 db and the downstream minimum ADSL transmission rate to 128 Kbps 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set profile gold fast 800 8000 5 0 30 64 6 0 31 128 This next example creates a similar premium profile named goldi except it sets an interleave delay of 16 ms for both upstream and downstream traffic 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set profile gold 800 8000 ldly 16 16 5 0 30 64 6 O 31 128 24 3 14 Delete Profile Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt delete profile lt name gt where lt name gt A profile nam
140. annels Command 24 3 25 Show PVCs command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show pvcs The show pvcs command allows you to display the PVC parameters of all ADSL ports This command is equal to the show chs command see section 26 3 5 Show Channels Command ADSL Commands 24 15 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 25 G SHDSL Commands The G SHDSL G 991 2 Single pair High speed Digital Subscriber Line subsystem allows you to configure and monitor the G SHDSL ports on the SAM1008 network module 25 1 GSHDSL Overview Refer to the web configurator chapter on G SHDSL for background information on G SHDSL 25 2 Configured Versus Actual Speed You configure the maximum and minimum speed of individual G SHDSL ports using the set profile command However due to noise and other factors on the line the actual speed may not reach the maximum that you specify Even though you can specify arbitrary numbers in the set profile command the actual rate is always a multiple of 64 Kbps If you enter a rate that is not a multiple of 64 Kbps the actual value will be the next lower multiple of 64Kbps For instance if you specify 2100 Kbps for a port the actual value will be 2048 Kbps and if you specify 2120 Kbps the actual value will be 2112Kbps Note that when you configure a G SHDSL profile the upstream and downstream speeds are the same The minimum rate must be less than or equal to the maximum rate The list port command displays the confi
141. ano nn rro nn r rana rrrnnn 10 7 Figure 1077 Bridge MAG Filler Setup cia 10 8 Figure 10 8 Bridge MAC Filter Entry List 00 cece cet eee tenner ernie ee ete ee er non cnc canon nr rana rra 10 8 Figure 10 9 Bridge MAC Filter Entry Add on etn ee eee ee erent ee d ee canon ee ran rra 10 9 Figure 10 10 MAC Count Filter Setup eee ener irr ne EA ee eee naar n nn cnn nn n rr KRETAS KAE EATARRA 10 10 Figure 10 11 MAC Count Filter Edit enoni cen tr eerie reenter cano cnn aeia nn r ran E E Ei Eee i ee 10 11 Figure 10 12 Bridge MAC Address RecoOrdO oooooocccccococccccononcccnononcncnnnnonnncnnnnnnncnn eri EARNER E ENAA TARRE ARNIKA SEERA TERE 10 12 Figure 10 13 Bridge IGMP Snooping Record recaro iaaa Erea KEEA ETE EEA EE ARAETA E 10 14 Figure 10 14 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub option Format oooonccccnnnoniccnnnoccccnononcnnnanoncnccnnno nc nr nano nn rra rca 10 15 Figure 10 15 DHCP Relay Setups cian iaa aiii 10 16 Figure 10 16 Add DHCP SENO Deade i cs ts A A T S ripio rita 10 17 Figure 10 17 RADIUS Servericicc eh tad ane eh eco bei 10 18 Figure 10 13 3021X SOUD citrato racista da 10 18 Figure 10 19 RADIUS Server SStUD si ia 10 19 Figure 10 20 Edit 8021X SUD tddi RE apando citada 10 20 Figure 10 21 Bridge Fast Mode VLAN ID SetUp oooononccccnnoccccnnnconcccnononcccnnnoncncnnnoncncnnnn nn nnnn nn nnc cnn nan nr cc naar arc nnnrncccnnnns 10 21 Figure 10 22 IP Sii a edhe dee 10 22 Figure 111 ADSL Port Setup A ee Ae ee 11 4 Figures11 2 ADSL
142. anos do dic oi 1 1 152 Applications rs a a dan 1 4 Chapter 2 Factory Default SOtuinGS comica ll ltd dad ds 2 1 PAN IPS e ei na EL P EN 2 1 AS O O NN e 2 1 2 3 SNMP COMMUNITY STE iia AA A a a EE E AEE aii ses 2 1 2 4 Console Telnet Web Configurator and FTP Password cccecccesseessceeseeeseeeseeeseecsaecaaeenaeenseseneeeneenaes 2 1 2 5 G SHDSL ASA EN 2 1 26 ADSL Ports AAMIOO Totti A A dia 2 2 O Ethemet Portre NOR 2 2 2 8 Other Factory Defaults cion A A E aa 2 2 Chapter 3 Hardware Overvie Wee eie ea needa eataa EEA t aaa dad aada 3 1 3 1 Additional Installation Requirements oonooonincononononoconoconoconoconoconoconnonn nono nconnnon nono nn nn nn conan nn ran n ran rnn nro 3 1 3 2 AC Power Front P nel orac a ii spa 3 1 3 3 DE Power Front Panel iia 3 1 Chapter 4 Hardware Installation cccccccceeccececeececeeeeeseeeeaeceeeeeeeecaceaaanaeceeeeesecsaaneeeeeeeesaeqeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneanes 4 1 4 1 ENVIO MED A A A das 4 1 4 2 Freestanding IES 1000 Installation Requirements ooooooonnoonionnnocnnonnnonnoon ccoo ncon nono noco naco n nc nn carr rnnr nana 4 1 4 3 Rack mounted IES 1000 Installation Requirement cccccccsccesseessecseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeesaeesaees 4 1 4 4 Mounting the IES 1000 ona Rack eirioes tny eree annsa neas ee aa a a a aa iS 4 1 Chapter 5 Removing and Installing Network Modules ooooonoccccnnnncoconnnnoccncnonononcno nono nano nnno nan r rro narran rra 5 1 Table of Con
143. are no previously installed MDFs There is no phone service and you want to install the AAM1008 for data access only No connections from the CO ports are necessary You may connect using an MDF or attach RJ 11 connectors to the non AAM1008 side of the telephone wire and then connect to ADSL modem directly 6 6 Hardware Connections IES 1000 User s Guide CONSOLE 1 2 3 4 USER 5 6 7 8 O mi Te i E FL ISE AE O I l TA AAA ADSL modem Figure 6 7 Installation Scenario A Procedure To Connect To An MDF Step 1 Connect the RJ 11 connector end of a telephone wire to one of the USER ports on the AAM1008 Step 2 Connect the other end of the telephone wire to the upper ports of the MDF using a punch down tool Step 3 Connect the telephone wiring from each end user s ADSL modem to the lower ports of the MDF 6 4 3 Installation Scenario B Phone service is available There is one MDF from which end users CO connections are made see next figure Hardware Connections 6 7 IES 1000 User s Guide Telephone cables Figure 6 8 One MDF for End user and CO Connections Please refer to the following figure for the connection schema gt MDF 1 is the original MDF used for tel
144. artition gt Commits ISFS files to the specified partition version Shows the FLASHFS driver s version information wipe Erases the current partition lt partition gt Erases the specified partition fm append lt file gt lt text gt Appends text to the specified file in the current file system cat lt file gt Shows the contents of the specified file in the current file system cp lt src file gt lt dest file gt Copies a source file to a destination file default lt fs gt Displays or sets the current file system to either isfs or flashfs fsinfo Shows file system information info lt file gt Shows file information ls ON ee Shows all files in the current file system mv lt src file gt lt dest file gt Gives the source file the same name as the destination file rm lt file gt Removes a file Commands Introduction 22 9 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION version Shows the version information of file system adsl The adsl commands apply to the AAM module config save Saves configuration of the ADSL module to nonvolatile memory enable ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Enables the specified PVC channel s chs lt start port gt lt stop Enables all PVC channels for specific port gt ports port lt port gt Enables the specified ADSL port ports Enables all ADSL ports disable ch lt port gt lt vpi g
145. ased networks lt rx vpi gt The VCI setting for the G SHDSL ports for use with Rx based networks The lt rx vpi gt and lt rx vci gt settings will be equal to those of lt tx vpi gt and lt tx vci gt ifthe rx settings are not configured The set pvcs command allows you to configure a single PVC for all of the G SHDSL ports at once 25 3 19 Show PVC Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt show pvc lt port gt where lt port gt A port number from 1 to 8 This command allows you to display the PVC parameters of an individual G SHDSL port This command is equal to the show chs lt port gt command see section 26 3 5 Show Channels Command 25 3 20 Show PVCs Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt show pvcs This command allows you to display the PVC parameters of all G SHDSL ports G SHDSL Commands 25 9 IES 1000 User s Guide 25 3 21 Display All GSHDSL Line Information Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt monitor lt start port gt lt stop port gt where lt start port gt The first port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information 1 is used if you leave this blank lt stop port gt The last port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information 8 is used if you leave this blank This command displays all G SHDSL line information Information is updated every five seconds Press any key and then press ENTER to stop updating information
146. ate gt the connection s rate GSHDSL lt port gt Link WARN A G SHDSL port lost its connection Down SN lt seq no gt NM lt noise margin gt ATT lt loop attenuation gt GSHDSL lt port gt CRC WARN These are G SHDSL port error counters crcAnomaly lt couterl gt E LOSW Defect lt couter2 gt lt couter1 gt the number of cyclic redundancy check errors LOSW Failure lt couter3 gt lt couter2 gt the number of Loss of Sync Word defects lt couter3 gt the number of Loss of Sync Word failures GSHDSL lt port gt ATT WARN These are G SHDSL port error counters Defect lt couterl gt SNR E 1 gt th b fti he Doro eh couter1 gt the number of times the loop attenuation was too lt couter2 gt SNR Signal to Noise Ratio the number of times the signal quality was too low HTTPD data crash ERROR The network module failed in an attempt to construct an HTTP web theAllegroServerDataPt configurator session r lt mem addr gt File too large lt file WARN The file size was too large with an attempted HTTP web id gt lt file size gt configurator firmware upload Insecure HTTP From lt ip WARN Someone tried to start an HTTP web configurator session from the addr gt listed IP address and it did not match any of the configured secured client IP addresses Watchdog timeout WARN The hardware watchdog determined that the network module was hung or not executing the correct sequence of code and restarted the networ
147. ateway 23 3 6 Set Slot Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt set slot lt slot number gt where lt slot number gt This network module s number in the IES 1000 chassis 1 or 2 This command sets slot number of the network module This is an optional parameter to help network administrators keep track of individual network modules Enter the command without the slot number to display the network module s slot number 23 3 1 Set Chassis Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt set chassis lt chassis number gt System Commands 23 3 IES 1000 User s Guide where lt chassis number gt The number for this IES 1000 chassis 1 to 64 This command sets a number to identify this IES 1000 in a network This is an optional parameter to help network administrators keep track of multiple IES 1000s Enter the command without the chassis number to display the IES 1000 s chassis number 23 4 Secured Host Commands Allow up to ten remote administrators to access your IES 1000 via IP addresses you specify 23 4 1 Secured Host Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt secured host lt mode gt where lt mode gt enable or disable If lt mode gt disable default then anyone may access your IES 1000 If lt mode gt enable then only those computers with IP addresses specified by you may access your IES 1000 refer to the Secured Host Add command This command enables disables the secured host function To display curre
148. ateway MAC Media Access Control Filter Use the MAC filter to filter incoming frames based on MAC Media Access Control address es that you specify You may enable disable the MAC filter on specific ports You may specify up to five MAC addresses per port MAC Media Access Control Count Filter N wire mode is available with the DO hardware The hardware version is in the serial number on the sticker on the SAM1008 network module You can also use the sys info command to display the hardware version 1 2 Getting to Know the IES 1000 IES 1000 User s Guide You can limit the number of MAC addresses that may be dynamically learned or statically configured on a port You may enable disable the MAC count filter on individual ports IEEE 802 1X Port based Authentication The IES 1000 supports the IEEE 802 1X standard for centralized user authentication through an optional network authentication RADIUS server Secured Host Allow up to ten remote hosts to access your IES 1000 via IP addresses you specify System Error Logging The system error log will record error logs locally to the IES 1000 memory UNIX Syslog Logging Use UNIX syslog commands to send logs to your UNIX server Protocol e Multiprotcol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 1483 Management e Remote configuration backup restore and firmware upgrade e SNMP manageable e Text based management locally via console port and remotely via telnet e Web
149. ber This command displays the MAC filtering status and the fixed source MAC addresses on a port or on all ports if no port is specified 28 4 2 MAC Filter Enable Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt macfilter enable lt port gt where lt port gt A bridge port number This command enables the MAC filtering feature on a specific port or on all ports if no port is specified 28 4 3 MAC Filter Disable Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt macfilter disable lt port gt where lt port gt A bridge port number This command disables the MAC filtering feature on a specific port or on all ports if no port is specified 28 4 4 MAC Filter Add Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt macfilter add lt port gt lt mac gt where 28 2 Bridge Commands IES 1000 User s Guide lt port gt _ A bridge port number lt mac gt The source MAC address in 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 format This command adds a source MAC address fixed on a specified port You may add up to five MAC addresses 28 4 5 MAC Filter Delete Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt macfilter delete lt port gt lt mac gt where lt port gt A bridge port number lt mac gt The source MAC address in 00 a0 c5 12 34 56 format This command removes a configured source MAC address from a port specified by you 28 5 Filter Commands 28 5 1 Filter Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt filter This command displays the filtering da
150. bleshooting Data Transmission STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Check to see that the VPI VCI settings in the DSL modem or router match those of the DSL port on the IES 1000 refer to the sections on the DSL port channel setup screens Also make sure that the subscriber s modem is using RFC 1483 encapsulation If the subscriber is using a router with routing mode make sure it is using ENET ENCAP 2 Check the IES 1000 s VLAN configuration see the VLAN chapter Ping the IES 1000 from the computer behind the DSL modem or router If you cannot ping connect a DSL modem to a DSL port that is known to work on the same IES 1000 If the DSL modem or router works with a different DSL port there may be a problem with the original port Contact the distributor 5 If using a different port does not work try a different DSL modem or router with the original port Troubleshooting 21 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 21 3 DSL LED s Turn On and Off A DSL LED turns on and off intermittently Table 21 3 Troubleshooting a Non Constant DSL LED STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Check the IES 1000 s diagnostic screen 2 Connect a DSL modem directly to the DSL port of the IES 1000 using a different telephone wire If the DSL LED still turns on and off repeatedly contact the distributor 21 4 Data Rate The SYNC rate is not the same as the configured rate Table 21 4 Troubleshooting the SYNC rate
151. box to turn on this ADSL port The ADSL ports are disabled by default because an enabled but disconnected ADSL port generates more heat than an operating port Disable ADSL ports when they are not in use to minimize heat generation and enhance reliability Default 802 1p Type the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Priority Profile Use the drop down list box to select a profile to assign to this port Mode Use the drop down list box to select the ADSL operational mode for this port 11 10 ADSL Module Port Setup IES 1000 User s Guide Table 11 6 ADSL Port Setup Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Default VLAN Type the Port VLAN ID PVID from 1 to 4094 The IES 1000 assigns the PVID to untagged ID frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this port GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network The IES 1000 propagates VLAN information to other devices when this check box is selected VLAN Select All if you want the port to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames on this Acceptable port Choose Tagged if you want the port to accept just tagged incoming frames on this Frame Type port Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off o
152. can specify arbitrary numbers in the set profile command the actual rate is always a multiple of 32 Kbps If you enter a rate that is not a multiple of 32 Kbps the actual rate will be the next lower multiple of 32Kbps For instance if you specify 60 Kbps for a port the actual rate for that port will not exceed 32 Kbps and if you specify 66 Kbps the actual rate will not be over 64Kbps Note that when you configure an ADSL port the upstream rate must be less than or equal to the downstream rate Note also that the List port command displays the configured parameters of the ADSL port while the show port command displays the actual rates 243 ADSL Commands Use these commands to configure an AAM 1008 s ADSL ports and profiles The commands related to one subsystem are grouped under a primary command of that subsystem To configure the ADSL parameters you must first enter the ADSL subsystem by entering the ads 1 command as shown next Syntax 192 168 1 1 gt adsl 192 168 1 1 adsl gt When you see the 192 168 1 1 ads1 gt command line prompt you are ready to enter G SHDSL commands Enter the home command to return to the 192 168 1 1 gt prompt 24 3 1 Config Save Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt config save ADSL Commands 24 1 IES 1000 User s Guide The config save command saves the ADSL configuration into nonvolatile memory 24 3 2 Disable Port Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt disable port l
153. cation installation in a central office and basement installation Scalable Platform for Future Expansion The flexible design of the IES 1000 series allows service providers to start with minimum cost As the number of subscribers and applications increases additional IES 1000s can be added to provide greater bandwidth 1 2 Applications The following sections describe example applications for the IES 1000 1 2 1 MTU Application The following figure depicts a typical application of the IES 1000 in a large residential building or multiple tenant unit MTU that leverages the existing phone line wiring to provide Internet access to all tenants A tenant connects a computer to the phone line in a unit using a G SHDSL or ADSL modem The other end of the phone line is connected to a port on the IES 1000 The IES 1000 aggregates the traffic from tenants to the Ethernet port and then forwards it to a router The router then routes the traffic further to the Internet 1 4 Getting to Know the IES 1000 IES 1000 User s Guide Ethernet USB cable Ethernet cable Multiple Tenant Unit MTU G SHDSL modem POTS splitter pz ADSL modem G SHDSL modem POTS splitter NY A ADSL modem nun MDE IES 1000 Figure 1 1 MTU Application twisted pair cable gateway Getting to Know the IES 1000 1 5 IES 1000 User s Guide 1 2 2 Central Office or ISP Ap
154. conds This command sets or shows the aging out timer period of the filtering database It is recommended that you use the default setting If the time interval is set too short it could increase broadcast traffic and reduce the available bandwidth 28 5 4 Flush Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt flush port where port A bridge port number This command flushes out the filtering database of the specified bridge port If the lt port gt field is omitted this command will flush out the filtering databases of all ports 28 5 5 Info Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt info This command shows the software version number of the bridge implementation and the maximum size of the filtering database 28 4 Bridge Commands IES 1000 User s Guide 28 5 6 Ethertype Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt ethertype lt port gt lt anyliplpppoe gt where lt port gt _ A bridge port number any The filter allows all packet types to be forwarded to and from the specified port ip The filter allows IP packets only to be forwarded to and from the specified port pppoe The filter allows PPPoE packets only to be forwarded to and from the specified port The Ethernet type filter controls which types of packets to forward to individual ports Use ether type without the port number and packet type to display the Ethernet type filter settings 28 6 Port Filter Commands Port Based VLAN See the web configurator Get
155. configurator Security e Password protection for system management e VLAN Multiple PVC and ATM QoS The IES 1000 allows you to use different channels also called Permanent Virtual Circuits or PVCs for different services or subscribers Define up to eight channels on each DSL port for different services or levels of service and assign each channel a priority ATM Quality of Service QoS allows you to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission This helps eliminate congestion to allow the transmission of real time data such as audio and video DHCP Relay with Relay Agent Information Option The IES 1000 can relay client TCP IP configuration requests to a DHCP server and the server s responses back to the clients The IES 1000 also has the relay agent information option also known as option 82 feature to add information to client TCP IP configuration requests that it relays to a DHCP server IGMP Snooping IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol snooping reduces multicast traffic for maximum performance Getting to Know the IES 1000 1 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Overheating Detection Warning and Safegaurd An ALM LED turns on when the IES 1000 s internal temperature is too high and turns off when the temperature has returned to a normal level Internal fans cool the unit Compact Design for Limited Space The IES 1000 occupies only 1 U of standard Telco rack space Its compactness is perfect for collo
156. ct 8 wire to bond 8 wire four port n wire groups together You must use the Add G SHDSL N wire Group screen to configure the 4 or 8 wire bundled groups before you can use this screen to bond them Select STU C to set this end of the connection as the SHDSL Terminal Unit Central side Select STU R to set this end of the connection as the SHDSL Terminal Unit Remote side You can bond multiple groups of ports as long as they do not overlap One SAM1008 module can have both STU C and STU R groups Make sure that G SHDSL ports one through four are all the same end of their connections all STU C or all STU R Make sure that G SHDSL ports five through eight are all the same end of their connections all STU C or all STU R G SHDSL ports one through four do not need to be set to be the same end of the connection as G SHDSL ports five through eight For example G SHDSL ports one through four could be set to be STU C while G SHDSL ports five through eight are set to be STU R G SHDSL Module Port Setup 12 11 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 12 7 Add G SHDSL Port Bonding LABEL DESCRIPTION Available Ports When you select a 2 wire mode the screen displays the available ports those that are not Available members of an n wire group or another port bonding group Select the member ports for this Groups port bonding group Configure the groups on both ends of a connection with the same number of ports When you se
157. d SCR applies with the rt vbr and nrt vbr traffic classes Minimum Cell Rate MCR is the minimum rate at which the sender can send cells MCR applies with the abr traffic class BT NRM Burst Tolerance BT is the maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards BT applies with the rt vbr and nrt vbr traffic classes The Number of Resource Management NRM cells is the maximum number of cells a source may send for each forward Resource Management cell NRM applies with the abr traffic class Add Click this button to configure a new VC profile Delete Select a VC profile s Delete check box and click the Delete button to remove the VC profile Virtual Channel Management 13 7 IES 1000 User s Guide DSL Port VC Profile Add or Edit Screen Do the following to open the VC Profile screen Step 1 Click a DSL port s index number in the Port Setup screen to go to the DSL Port Setup screen Step 2 Click Channel Setup in the DSL Port Setup screen to go to the Channel Setup screen Step 3 Click VC Profile in the Channel Setup screen to open the VC Profile screen Step 4 Click the Add button in the VC Profile screen to add a new VC profile or click an existing VC profile s link in the Profile Name column to edit the profile Add VC Profile Profile Name Encap LLC AAL AALS Class ubr gt PCR r cells sec CDVT x cells SCRIMCR cells sec BTINRM cells Apply Reset Figure
158. d displays all of the bonded members An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt list bond Port bonding configuration Bonding name Mode Member list el 2 wire STU C port 2 4 8 This displays the members that have been bound together in order to form a logical link 25 16 G SHDSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 26 Virtual Channel Management This chapter shows you how to use commands to configure virtual channels 26 1 About Virtual Channels See the web configurator chapter on virtual channel management for background information on virtual channels The configuration of virtual channels is the same for both the AAM and SAM network modules 26 2 Virtual Channel Profile Commands Use the following commands to configure virtual channel profiles 26 2 1 Set VCP Command The syntax is as follows whenever the class is cbr or ubr 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set vcp lt profile name gt lt encap gt lt aal gt lt class gt lt pcr gt lt cdvt gt lt scr mcr gt lt bt nrm gt The syntax 1s as follows whenever the class is rt vbr or nrt vbr 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set vcp lt profile name gt lt encap gt lt aal gt lt class gt lt pcr gt lt cdvt gt lt scr gt lt bt gt The syntax is as follows whenever the class is abr 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set vcp lt profile name gt lt encap gt lt aal gt lt class gt lt pcr gt lt cdvt gt lt mcr gt lt nrm gt where lt profile name gt T
159. d speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the WAN switch Ethernet port are in the same order to connect 8 6 There Is No Voice on an ADSL Connection The AAM1008 has internal POTS Plain Old Telephone Service splitters and CO side RJ 11 ports that allow the telephone wiring used for ADSL connections to also simultaneously carry normal voice conversations Table 8 6 ADSL Voice Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure the subscriber has a POTS splitter properly installed 2 Check the ADSL line pin assignments shown in the Pin Assignments appendix 3 Check the telephone wire connections between the subscriber and the MDF s 4 Check the telephone wire and connections between the MDF s and USER port s 5 Check the telephone wire and connections between the MDF s and the CO port s Check the connection from the MDF s to the telephone company or the PBX 6 Check the telephone wire mapping on the MDF s Make sure the in house wiring works and is connected properly 8 Repeat the steps above using a different ADSL port 8 7 Testing Wiring Use the following tests if there is no voice Systematically test wiring using a functioning telephone to determine if there is a wiring problem If the connection is good the telephone will return a dial tone Letters in the figure shown next indicate the systematic Hardware
160. d transmission is faster a fast channel This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary 11 6 ADSL Configured Versus Actual Rate You configure the maximum rate of an individual ADSL port by modifying its profile see the ADSL Edit Profile screen or assigning the port to a different profile see the ADSL Edit Port Setup screen However due to noise and other factors on the line the actual rate may not reach the maximum that you specify Even though you can specify arbitrary numbers using the ADSL Edit Profile screen the actual rate is always a multiple of 32 Kbps If you enter a rate that is not a multiple of 32 Kbps the actual rate will be the next lower multiple of 32Kbps For instance if you specify 60 Kbps for a port the actual rate for that port will not exceed 32 Kbps and if you specify 66 Kbps the actual rate will not be over 64Kbps 11 7 ADSL Module Default Settings The default profile always exists and all ofthe ADSL ports use the default profile settings when the AAM 1008 is shipped The default profile s name is DEFVAL The default profile s maximum downstream rate can only be obtained when using the G dmt standard Configure a profile with a maximum downstream rate of 1536 Kbps or less for use with G lite 11 7 1 Default Profile Settings The following are the settings of the default profile Name DEFVAL Profile Status Active Downstream ADSL settings Latenc
161. dual ADSL port 24 3 21 Show Ports Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show ports The show ports command shows the line status up or down the actual upstream downstream rates and the mode of all ADSL ports 24 3 22 Set PVC Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set pvc lt port number gt lt multiplexing mode gt lt tx vpi gt lt tx vci gt lt rx vpi gt lt rx vci gt where lt port number gt A port number from 1 to 8 lt multiplexing mode gt Either llc or yc lt tx vpi gt The VPI setting of the ADSL port for use with a Tx based network lt tx vci gt The VCI setting for the ADSL port for use with a Tx based network lt rx vpi gt The VPI setting for the ADSL port for use with Rx based networks lt rx vci gt The VCI setting for the ADSL port for use with Rx based networks The lt tx vpi gt and lt tx vci gt settings define virtual channels for outgoing downstream traffic The lt rx vpi gt and lt rx vci gt settings define virtual channels for incoming upstream traffic The lt rx vpi gt and lt rx vci gt settings will be equal to those of lt tx vpi gt and lt tx vci gt ifthe rx settings are not configured The set pvc command allows the configuration of a PVC permanent virtual circuit for an individual ADSL port The following example sets ADSL port 5 to use the LLC multiplexing mode Tx VPI 8 and Tx VCI 33 The results of this command are reflected when you us
162. e cccccccccccssccessceseceseceseceeecseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseecsaecaaecesesereneeeeags 12 2 12 7 DefaultG SHDSE Module Settings 42 0 0 tao acosa 12 3 12 8 G SHDSL Module Port Setup Screen nnnc a A AEE e A E EE 12 3 Chapter 13 Virtual Channel Management cece cece nono ncnonnn ocn nn ono nn nano n nn rn nn rca rra r narrar 13 1 13 1 About Virtual Channel sy c esenee doch obscok cess cade ch reviouesvte dace a ieee cnt oncusadndous aa eE ee 13 1 13 2 DSL Port Channel Setup Screen occian noine ana na asn E a acan i i n 13 2 18 3 ATM Oo A EA R a ETE 13 3 13 4 Traffic Shapih girini a 13 3 Advanced Applications and Management 2 ccccecseeeeeeee ee eeeeee nnmnnn cess seaeaaeaeeeeeseseneanaeeeeeseseeeenanee IV Chapter 14 Static Role coria ini RNA cias stots 14 1 14 1 Static Ro te OVETVIE Wisin doit i a Rada 14 1 14 2 Static Route Setup CT s un pan rola II Eldar 14 1 Table of Contents ix IES 1000 User s Guide Chapters15 MELANIE AS A AAA A ARI aad 15 1 135 VEAN Overview Loteriei teen e e da E T 15 1 15 2 Tagged VLANS IEEE 802 TQ eieren e lA dates 15 1 15 3 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames 0ooooconocccocnnocononononncnnnoon ccoo nono nono noco nac nn carr rnn rra rrnnn rancio 15 2 154 Filtering Databases a E 15 2 15 5 Automatic VLAN Registration cccccccsseessecsseceseceseceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseessecsecesecnseeseeeseseseseeeseeeeeeeeesaes 15 3 1570 GARB reset i i a a eta
163. e The delete profile command allows you to delete an individual profile by its name You cannot delete a profile that is assigned to any of the DSL ports in the network module Assign a different profile to any DSL ports that are using the profile that you want to delete and then you can delete the profile The following example deletes the gold ADSL profile 192 168 1 1 adsl gt delete profile gold 24 10 ADSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide 24 3 15 List Profiles Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt list profiles The list profiles command displays all ofthe ADSL ports and that profile is assigned to each one An example is shown next This display shows that there are two profiles DEFVAL and debug and that port 4 belongs to the debug profile while ports 1 2 3 5 6 7 and 8 belong to the DEFVAL profile 192 168 1 1 adsl gt list profiles Profile 1 DEFVAL Profile 2 debug Port Profile Profile Port Profile Port Profile Port Profile Port Profile Profile Port Profile Figure 24 5 List Profiles Command Example 24 3 16 Show Profile Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show profile lt name gt where lt name gt A profile name The show profile command displays the settings of an ADSL profile An example is shown next This display shows that the maximum downstream transmission rate is set to 8000 kbps and the maximum upstream transmission rate is set to 800 kbps The Conf Profil
164. e Eight RJ 11 6P2C interfaces for ADSL service One mini RJ 11 4P4C interface for local console connection One RJ 45 10 100Base TX auto negotiation interface This Fast Ethernet port is compliant with TEEE802 3 and IEEE802 3u standards LED indicators for system status overheat warning ALM 10 100M Ethernet LAN and ADSL interface status Other Hardware Features Built in fans Temperature sensors for temperature monitoring Surge protection to prevent lightening damage Dimensions 440mm W x 320mm D x 44 45mm H Weight One AC power IES 1000 no modules 4 kg One DC power IES 1000 no modules 5 kg One SAM1008 8 kg Hardware Specifications IES 1000 User s Guide e One AAM1008 1 1 kg Wire Gauge Specifications Chart 1 Wire Gauge Specifications WIRE TYPE REQUIRED AWG NO DIAMETER Telephone Wire 26 or larger DC Power Model IES 1000 Power Wire 16 to 18 American Wire Gauge AWG is a measurement system for wire that specifies its thickness As the thickness of the wire increases the AWG number decreases AC Power Model Power Source 100 240VAC 1A 50 60Hz DC Power Model Power Source 36 72VDC 75 Watt AC Power Model Power Consumption e 60 watts maximum e 100 240VAC 1A 50 60Hz AC Power Model Fuse Rating T3A 250VAC DC Power Model Fuse Rating T4A 250VDC Operating Environment e Temperature 0 C 50 C e Humidity 5 95 Storage Environment e Temperature 25 C
165. e 4 or 8 wire groups and the groups cannot be members of another port bonding group Configure the groups on both ends of a connection with the same number of 4 or 8 wire groups This command bonds the specified member list into a single port for the STU R SHDSL Termination Unit Remote One SAM1008 must be set to be the central side and the other must be set to be the remote side Configure both with the same number of ports set to connect to the other SAM1008 and bonded You can bond multiple groups of ports as long as they do not overlap One SAM1008 module can have both STU C and STU R groups Make sure that G SHDSL ports one through four are all the same end of their connections all STU C or all STU R Make sure that G SHDSL ports five through eight are all the same end of their connections all STU C or all STU R G SHDSL Commands 25 13 IES 1000 User s Guide G SHDSL ports one through four do not need to be set to be the same end of the connection as G SHDSL ports five through eight For example G SHDSL ports one through four could be set to be STU C while G SHDSL ports five through eight are set to be STU R The following example sets an STU R port bonding group named r1 for ports 3 to 6 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set bondr rl 3 6 Make sure you set all of the bonded ports to have the same PVID see section 31 3 3 PVID Command If the ports are enabled and you change them from central side to remote side or vice v
166. e Diagnostic screen Use this screen to check system logs reset the system or ping IP addresses Diaqnostic o Thu Jan 01 00 00 07 SNMPR WARN Warm Start Trap 1 Thu Jan 01 00 05 56 INFO CONSOLE Session End 2 Thu Jan 01 00 24 26 CC INFO CONSOLE Session Begin 3 Thu Jan 01 00 31 30 CONSOL INFO CONSOLE Session End System Log Display Reset System Clear System Log P Ping Figure 20 1 Diagnostic The following table describes this screen Table 20 1 Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION DSL Click this link to open the DSL Line Diagnostic screen System Log Click this button to display a log of events in the multi line text box Display Diagnostic 20 1 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 20 1 Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION Reset System Click this button to restart the IES 1000 A warning dialog box displays asking if you re sure you want to restart the system Click OK to proceed Clear System Click this button to clear the log of events in the multi line text box Log IP Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Ping Click this button to have the IES 1000 ping the IP address in the field to the left 5 times 20 3 Log Format The common format of the system logs is lt item no gt lt time gt lt process gt lt type gt lt log message gt Table 20 2 Log Format LABEL DESCRIPTION lt i
167. e Ethernet test timeout value thernet set auto lt on off gt Enables disables Ethernet port auto negotiation duplex lt full half gt Sets the Ethernet port to full or half duplex speed lt 100 10 gt Sets the operating speed of the Ethernet port 100M or 10M status Shows Ethernet link status auto negotiation duplex speed save Saves Ethernet settings exit Ends the console or telnet session flashfs config Displays the configuration of the flash file system default Shows the current partition lt partition gt Selects a partition as the current flash file system 22 8 Commands Introduction IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION fsck Does a file system check in the current partition lt partition gt Does a file system check in the specified partition format Formats the current partition lt partition gt Formats the specified partition id lt n gt Shows the chip ID of the n th flash chip info Shows file system information partitions Shows all partitions information rewrite lt file gt Rewrites the boot area with the specified ISFS file trace Shows the trace level in the FLASHFS driver lt level gt Sets the trace level in the FLASHFS driver update Commits ISFS files to the current partition lt p
168. e length and line quality The farther away the subscriber s ADSL modem or router is or the more interference there is on the line the higher the power will be Current ATUR Information This section contains data acquired from the ATUR ADSL Termination Unit Remote during negotiation provisioning message interchanges This information can help in identifying the subscriber s ADSL modem or router Information obtained prior to training to steady state transition will not be valid or will be old information Country Code The country code is from the Vendor ID g 994 1 Provider Code The provider code includes the Vendor ID and Version Number obtained from Vendor ID fields g 994 1 or R MSGS1 T1 413 Capabilities The Capabilities section displays what kind of DSL connection the subscriber s ADSL modem or router supports 24 3 8 Lineperf Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt lineperf lt port number gt where lt port number gt A port number from 1 to 8 The lineperf command shows the line performance counters of an ADSL port An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 adsl gt lineperf 7 nfebe 1 nfebe ni 0 0 ncrc I ncrc ni 0 0 nfecc 1 nfecc ni 0 0 nfec I nfec ni 0 0 nblks ds nblks us 120878 120878 nsec ds nsec us 2060 2060 n eb ds n eb us 0 0 n bbe ds n bbe us 0 0 n es ds n es us 0 0 n ses ds n ses us 0 0 non ses blks ds non ses blks us 120878 120878 n ua
169. e the show pvcs command 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set pvc 5 llc 8 33 24 14 ADSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide 24 3 23 Set PVCs Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set pvcs lt multiplexing mode gt lt tx vpi gt lt tx vci gt lt rx vpi gt lt rx vci gt where multiplexing mode either llc or vc lt tx vpi gt The VPI setting of the ADSL ports for use with a Tx based network lt tx vci gt The VCI setting for the ADSL ports for use with a Tx based network lt rx vpi gt The VPI setting for the ADSL ports for use with Rx based networks lt rx vpi gt The VCI setting for the ADSL ports for use with Rx based networks The lt rx vpi gt and lt rx vci gt settings will be equal to those of lt tx vpi gt and lt tx vci gt ifthe rx settings are not configured The set pvcs command allows you to configure a single PVC for all of the ADSL ports at once The following example sets all of the ADSL ports to use the LLC multiplexing mode Tx VPI 8 and Tx VCI 33 The results of this command are reflected when you use the show pves command 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set pvcs llc 8 33 24 3 24 Show PVC Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show pvc lt port number gt where lt port number gt A port number from 1 to 8 The show pvc command allows you to display the PVC parameters of an individual ADSL port This command is equal to the show chs lt port gt command see section 26 3 5 Show Ch
170. e using the correct power supply 2 Make sure the network module is properly installed in the IES 1000 refer to the Hardware Installation chapter 3 With the AC power model make sure the fuse is not burnt out Replace the fuse if it is burnt out refer to the Removing and Installing a Fuse appendix 4 The LED itself or the unit may be faulty contact your vendor 8 2 TheALM LED Is On The ALM alarm lights when the IES 1000 is overheated and or the fans are not working properly and or voltage readings are outside the tolerance levels Table 8 2 ALM LED Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure you can feel and or hear the fans working working fans emit a low buzz and blow air If the fans are not working properly make sure the power connector is connected properly Contact your vendor if the fans do not work Do not remove fans from the IES 1000 Only a qualified distributor should remove or repair fans Hardware Troubleshooting 8 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 8 3 The SHDSL LED s Do Not Turn On The SHDSL LEDs show the operational status of SHDSL port connections If the SHDSL LED is off it means the link to the SHDSL modem router is down or there is not a connection to the SHDSL port Table 8 3 SHDSL LED Troubleshooting STEP CORRECTIVE ACTION Ensure that all hardware connections are correctly installed including the modem router on the subscriber s side
171. eRowStatus displays active this means that the profile is available for use It does not mean that the profile has been applied to any of the ports Please refer to the set port command for information on assigning profiles to ports or the List profiles command for information on displaying the names of all of the profiles and which profile is assigned to each port ADSL Commands 24 11 IES 1000 User s Guide 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show profile gold Entry type adslLineConfProfileEntry ConfProfileName gold AtucConfRateChanRatio AtucConfTargetSnrMgn 6 db AtucConfMaxSnrMgn 31 db AtucConfMinSnrMgn 0 db AtucChanConfFastMinTxRate 32 Kbps AtucChanConfInterleaveMinTxRate 32 Kbps AtucChanConfFastMaxTxRate 8160 Kbps AtucChanConfInterleaveMaxTxRate 8000 Kbps AtucChanConfMaxInterleaveDelay 4 ms AturConfRateChanRatio 0 AturConfTargetSnrMgn 6 db AturConfMaxSnrMgn 31 db AturConfMinSnrMgn 0 db AturChanConfFastMinTxRate 32 Kbps AturChanConfInterleaveMinTxRate 32 Kbps AturChanConfFastMaxTxRate 1024 Kbps AturChanConfInterleaveMaxTxRate 800 Kbps AturChanConfMaxInterleaveDelay 4 ms ConfProfileRowStatus active 1 Figure 24 6 Show Profile Command Example 24 3 17 Show Profiles Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show profiles The show profiles command displays the settings of all the ADSL profiles 24 3 18 Set Port Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set port lt port number gt lt pro
172. ead community string is public 34 3 1 SNMP Access Read Write Command Syntax access lt read write gt lt community gt lt IP addr gt where lt read write gt Specifies read only read write permission lt communit y gt The password needed to access the SNMP agent on the network module lt IP addr gt The optional IP address of the allowed SNMP manager This command allows read only or read write access If the IP address is specified access is allowed for the manager station with that address only Remote Management 34 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 34 3 2 SNMP Access Delete Command Syntax access delete lt community gt lt IP addr gt This command revokes SNMP access by the specified community password If the IP address is specified access is denied for that manager station only 34 3 3 SNMP Access Flush Command Syntax access flush This command revokes access by any and all manager stations 34 3 4 SNMP Access List Command Syntax access list This command shows the allowed access 34 4 SNMP Trap Configuration The network module uses the SNMP trapping facility to proactively report unusual events to one or more trap servers To configure the trap parameters use the trap commands in the SNMP subsystem After configuring the SNMP trap parameters save the configuration to the nonvolatile memory with the config save command 34 4 1 Trap Add Command Syntax trap add
173. edly contact the distributor 37 4 Data Rate The SYNC rate is not the same as the configured rate Table 37 4 Troubleshooting the SYNC rate STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Connect the DSL modem or router directly to the DSL port of the network module using a different telephone wire If the rates match the regular phone wire quality may be limiting the speed to a certain rate see section 25 2 2 Use the 1ineperf command to check the subscriber s regular telephone wire refer to section 24 3 8 with the AAM1008 or section 25 3 7 with the SAM1008 If they do not match when a good wire is used contact the distributor 37 5 Port Bonding A bonded port s LED is off or the list ports command see section 25 3 9 shows a bonded port with a dropped status Table 37 5 Troubleshooting Port Bonding STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Check the transmission rate setting of the port s profile It is recommended that you set all of the bonded ports on both ends central and remote to use the same profile settings 2 Use the lineperf command refer to section 25 3 7 and note the fastest transmission rate of the members of the port bonding group You will need this information if you do step 6 37 2 Troubleshooting IES 1000 User s Guide Table 37 5 Troubleshooting Port Bonding STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION Swap the telephone wiring between the non transmitting port and one of the bonded
174. entions xxi GetNext 16 2 Glossary xxii GVRP 11 9 11 11 12 9 15 3 H Hardware Connections 6 1 Hardware Installation 4 1 Hardware Specifications Operating Environment Humidity H Operating Environment Temperature H Storage Environment Humidity H Storage Environment Temperature H Hardware Troubleshooting 8 1 Help Facility 22 2 Home Screen 9 2 IEEE 802 1p Priority 1 2 32 1 Commands 32 1 IEEE 802 1p Priority Commands 32 1 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN 1 2 15 1 23 3 28 7 28 8 Commands Default Introduction Register Your CPU IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Standard IEEE 802 1x IEEE 802 1X Commands IES 1000 IES 1000 Power Connections IGMP Snooping Monitoring Info Command Ingress Installation Requirements Installing a Network Module Installing Fuses Integrated Ethernet Switch Interference Statements Interleave Delay Internet Explorer 5 5 IP Address IP Commands IP DSLAM IP Parameters IP Setup IP Subnet Mask ISDN ITU T G 991 2 LED DSL 1 2 10 4 10 17 30 1 xxi 6 13 1 3 28 3 23 2 28 4 32 1 3 1 5 2 D xxi iii 24 5 9 1 10 22 33 1 1 1 2 1 10 22 10 22 xxi 24 13 12 1 8 2 8 3 Index IES 1000 User s Guide LEDs 3 2 MAC Filter 28 2 Lightening G Filter 28 2 Limited Warranty iv MAC Filter Add Command 28 2 Line Bit Allocation 24 3 MAC Filter Delete Command 28 3 Line Delay Command 24 8 MAC Filter Disable Command 28 2 Line Operating Values 24 4 25 3 MAC Filter Enable
175. ephone connections only gt MDF 2 is used for telephone connections only gt MDF 3 is for ADSL service connections Change the wiring in the following figure from MDF 1 to MDF 3 for telephone subscribers who want ADSL service 6 8 Hardware Connections IES 1000 User s Guide w DO 1 2 3 4 USER 5 6 7 8 ADSL r 1 r 1 1 5 Mj r 4 i Gil L J L a _ L L CONSOLE F Telephone cables User MDF 3 User with telephone only service Figure 6 9 Installation Scenario B Procedure To Connect To MDFs Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Acquire two additional MDFs MDFs 2 and 3 Connect the RJ 11 connector ends of telephone wires you want for ADSL service to the USER ports on the AAM1008 Connect the other ends of the telephone wires to the upper ports of MDF 3 using a punch down tool Connect the telephone wiring from the end user s ADSL modem s to the lower ports of MDF 3 Connect the RJ 11 connector ends of telephone wires you want for phone service to the AAM1008 ports labeled CO Connect the other ends of the telephone wires to the lower ports of MDF 2 using a punch down tool Connect the upper ports of MDF 2 to the lo
176. er VID and the management VID The port based VLAN is always active it is NOT mutually exclusive of the tag based VLAN The system performs tagged VLAN processing first and then port based VLAN in tandem The deletion of the default management VLAN and the enabling of the VLAN MUST be the last steps in the configuration procedure because once you change the settings you will not be able to connect to the network module with your computer which is without tagged VLAN capability You can configure the VLAN associated with the DSL ports before the uplink ports or you can do this over the network after the network module is put into service See the examples with the following procedure Procedure Step1 Use the IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN commands to configure tag based VLAN for the subscribers e Use the svlan setentry command to configure a VLAN ID for each subscriber gt Fora typical setup use fixed for the administration control for the DSL port numbered 2 9 and the uplink port number 1 gt Select untag for the tag control for the DSL port and tag for the uplink port gt Ignore any messages telling you to use the vlan enable command in order to enable GVRP Use the vlan enable command when you are finished configuring the VLAN see the last step e Use the pvid command to set the VLAN ID you created for a port to that specific port in the PVID table e Repeat these steps for the rest of the DSL ports
177. ersa all ports are set to the central side by default the system will take a few moments to process the change If the ports are not enabled the processing occurs when you enable them During this processing the system appears to be hanging 25 3 26 Port Bonding for 4 wire Groups Examples This example creates three 4 wire mode STU R groups and then bonds them together This line sets an STU R 4 wire mode 2 ports group with the name N wire A for ports 7 and 8 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set nwirer 4w N wire A 4 This line sets an STU R 4 wire mode 2 ports group with the name N wire B for ports 5 and 6 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set nwirer 4w N wire B 3 This line sets an STU R 4 wire mode 2 ports group with the name N wire C for ports 3 and 4 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set nwirer 4w N wire C 2 This line sets an STU R port bonding group named r1 for the N wire A N wire B and N wire C n wire groups 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set bondr 4w rl 2 4 25 3 27 Port Bonding for 8 wire Groups Examples This example creates two 8 wire mode STU R groups and then bonds them together This line sets an STU R 8 wire mode 4 ports group with the name N wire A for ports to 4 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set nwirer 8w N wire A 1 This line sets an STU R 8 wire mode 4 ports group with the name N wire B for ports 5 to 8 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set nwirer 8w N wire B 2 This line creates an STU R port bonding g
178. es Commands Fast Mode ccccccssessseesceeseeessecssecesecesecesecesecneeeeeeeeeeeeeneennes 28 7 Chapter 29 DHCP Relay Command cisco teatre ARA 29 1 291 DHCP Relay Overviewisenisssiinaieti ne nnana a irre eietin indi ea decay 29 1 29 2 DHCP Relay Commands uu asiriar nia aa a i a a naaa 29 1 29 3 DHCP Relay Agent Information Option ccccccccseeseeseeseenseceseceseceseeeecseeeeseecseecsaecaeceaeenseeseenaes 29 3 Chapter 30 IEEE 802 1X COMMAandS oooooccncccccnncccncnnononcnncnnncnnnnononnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnn nn nn rn a nan nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncinenninnanes 30 1 30 10 TEEE 802 1XOVEIVIS Wii il A do E aE aE iS 30 1 302 TEEE 802 1 COmMent 30 1 Chapter 31 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands cccccceceeceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeaeeetenaeeeseeaeees 31 1 31 1 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Introduction c cc cecccecceesseesceeseeececcecaeceaecnsecnsecneeseeeseeeeeseeeseeenaeesaes 31 1 31 2 Configuring the Tagged VEAN srcani r e a e a a en 31 1 31 3 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands cecccesscesseessceeeeeeeeeseeessecaaecaecaecuseenseeseneseeeseseenseeesaensaes 31 3 Chapter 32 IEEE 3802 1p Priority Command Smeri a aaa a a aaa legis aaa a a a aE 32 1 32 1 LO A A AS A A 32 1 32 2 IEEE 8021p Priority Commands ie e r ves eeccssetessbsantedtecgetaneds ova E A asados 32 1 Ghapter 33 OP GOM mad S a iz 33 1 33 1 Settings the TP Address iii it A td aida 33 1 33 2 General LP Command a a 33 2 Chapter
179. ess Entry The following table describes this screen Table 16 3 Add SNMP Access Entry LABEL DESCRIPTION SNMP Setup Click this link to go to the SNMP Setup page Trusted Host If you enter a trusted host your IES 1000 will only respond to SNMP messages from this address If you leave the field set to 0 0 0 0 default your IES 1000 will respond to all SNMP messages it receives regardless of source Community Enter the community which is the password for the incoming requests from the management station Access Right Select what access you want this SNMP access entry to allow from the management station Select None to not allow incoming Get and GetNext or Set requests Select Read to allow incoming Get GetNext and Set requests Select Write to allow incoming Set requests Send Trap Select Yes to have the IES 1000 send traps to the SNMP manager Select No to have the IES 1000 not send traps to the SNMP manager Setting the Access Right field to None and the Send Trap field to No renders the SNMP access entry invalid Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link in the navigation panel on the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this page afresh 16 4 SNMP IES 1
180. etup in the Bridge Setup screen to open this screen Getting Started Screens 10 7 IES 1000 User s Guide Bridge MAC Filter Setup Port ilteri Number Filtering Enabled Filter Entry Count no Figure 10 7 Bridge MAC Filter Setup The following table describes this screen Table 10 6 Bridge MAC Filter Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen Port Number Click the port name to edit that port s MAC filter setup Filtering Enabled This field tells whether or not filtering has been enabled for that port Filter Entry Count This field displays how many static MAC addresses are specified for the port Bridge MAC Filter Entry List Screen Click on a port link in the Bridge MAC Filter Setup screen to open this screen Bridge Mac Filter Entry List Ethernet I Filtering Enable Apply MAC Address Delete Add Delete Figure 10 8 Bridge MAC Filter Entry List The following table describes this screen 10 8 Getting Started Screens IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 7 Bridge MAC Filter Entry List LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen Bridge MAC Click this link to go to the Bridge MAC Filter Setup screen Filter Setup Filtering Enable Select this check box to enable MAC filtering on this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile
181. ey ESC means the Escape key and SPACE BAR means the Space Bar For brevity s sake we will use e g as shorthand for for instance and e for that is or in other words User s Guide Feedback Help us help you E mail all User s Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to techwriters zyxel com tw or send regular mail to The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Thank you Preface xxiii Overview and Installation Part I Overview and Installation This part introduces the general features default settings hardware and installation of the IES 1000 Integrated Ethernet Switch IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know the IES 1000 This chapter describes the key features benefits and applications of your IES 1000 The IES 1000 Integrated Ethernet Switch is an IP based DSLAM Internet Protocol Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer that connects up G SHDSL or ADSL subscribers to the Internet When deployed together with ZyXEL s DSL modems and WAN routers the combination forms an integrated solution for providing broadband services to multiple tenant units such as apartments hotels offices and campus buildings G SHDSL is an acronym for Single pair High speed Digital Subscriber Line ITU T G 991 2 defines the G in G SHDSL
182. fied by the sub command Statistics are available for the following traffic types ARP ICMP IP raw TCP and UDP 33 2 5 Subnet Add Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ip gt subnet add lt net name gt lt i f name gt a b c d am bm cm dm where lt net name gt Define the name of the subnet for identification purposes lt i f name gt The name of an interface ether for this device a b c d The subnet s IP address am bm cm dm The subnet s subnet mask This command defines a subnet Type subnet without any parameters to view a list of the configured subnets 33 2 6 Subnet Delete Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ip gt subnet delete lt net name gt where lt net name gt The name of the subnet This command removes a subnet 33 2 7 Subnet Flush Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ip gt subnet flush IP Commands 33 3 IES 1000 User s Guide This command removes all of the subnets 33 2 8 Route Add Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ip gt route add lt dom name gt a b c d lt relay gt am bm cm dm lt cost gt lt timeout gt where lt dom name gt The name of the static route a b c d The destination IP address of packets that this static route is to route lt relay gt The IP address of the gateway that you want to send the packets through am bm cm dm The destination subnet mask of packets that this static route is to route lt cost gt The metric hop count of this static
183. file name gt lt oper mode gt where lt port number gt Port number ranging from to 8 lt profile name gt The profile that will define the settings of this port lt oper mode gt The operational mode Choose from glite gdmt t1413 or auto for Annex A Choose from anxb etsi or auto for Annex B The set port command assigns a specific profile to an individual port and sets the port s mode or standard The profile defines the maximum and minimum upstream downstream rates the target upstream downstream signal noise margins and the maximum and minimum upstream downstream acceptable noise margins of all the ADSL ports to which you assign the profile 24 12 ADSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide The mode parameter specifies the standard that this port is allowed When set to auto the AAM1008 follows whatever mode is set on the other end of the line Annex A refers to ADSL over POTS and Annex B refers to ADSL over ISDN When the mode is set to auto and the negotiated mode is G lite if the configured rates exceed those allowed by G lite the actual rates are governed by G lite regardless of the configured numbers An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set port 4 gold auto This command sets ADSL port 4 to have the gold profile The results of this command are reflected when you use the list profiles command 24 3 19 Set Ports Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set ports lt profile name gt l
184. from nonvolatile memory lt module gt Resets configuration information in the specified module from nonvolatile memory save Saves configuration information in all modules to nonvolatile memory resource Shows the controlled resources in all processes 22 6 Commands Introduction IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION lt process gt Shows the controlled resources in the specified process lt process gt lt resource gt Shows the value of the specified resource in a process lt process gt lt resource gt lt value gt Sets the value of a process s resource version Shows the configuration driver s version information dhcprelay add lt ip gt Adds a DHCP server to the relay s list config Displays the list of DHCP servers to relay between delete lt ip gt all Deletes a DHCP server or all servers from the relay s list enable Turns on DHCP relay disable Turns off DHCP relay help Displays help on available commands reset Resets and restarts DHCP relay pool Shows the DHCP relay memory pool status status Shows whether or not DHCP relay is activated trace Activates trace option s untrace Deactivates trace option s version Displays the DHCP software version relayinfo enable Turns on the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 feature disable Turns off the DHCP relay agen
185. gn different priorities to different channels and consequently the services that get carried on them or the subscribers that use them For example you want to give high priority to voice service on one of the AAM1008 s ADSL ports Use the Edit Static VLAN screen to configure a static VLAN on the AAM1008 network module for voice on the port Use the ADSL Edit Port Channel Setup screen to Configure a channel on the port for voice service Set the channel to use the PVID of the static VLAN you configured Assign the channel a high priority 13 1 1 Super Channel The IES 1000 forwards frames belonging to VLAN groups that are not assigned to specific channels to the super channel Enable the super channel option to allow a channel forward frames belonging to multiple VLAN groups that are not assigned to other channels The super channel functions in the same way as the channel in a single channel environment One port can have only one super channel 13 1 2 LLC LLC is a type of encapsulation where one VC Virtual Circuit carries multiple protocols with each packet header containing protocol identifying information Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs Virtual Channel Management 13 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 131 3 VC Mux VC Mux
186. group s transmitting ports For example SHDSL ports 1 and 2 are bonded Port 2 is transmitting but port 1 is being dropped Connect port 2 s telephone wire to port 1 and port 1 s telephone wire to port 2 If port 1 does not transmit when using port 2 s telephone wire there may be a problem with port 1 Contact the distributor If port 1 transmits when using port 2 s telephone wire and port 2 does not transmit when using port 1 s telephone wire there may be a problem with port 1 s original telephone wire or the port at the other end of the connection Go to the next step Check the other end of the connection Swap the telephone wiring between the non transmitting port and one of the bonded group s transmitting ports For example SHDSL ports 1 and 2 are bonded Port 2 is transmitting but port 1 is being dropped Connect port 2 s telephone wire to port 1 If port 1 does not transmit when using port 2 s telephone wire there may be a problem with port 1 Contact the distributor If port 1 transmits when using port 2 s telephone wire and port 2 does not transmit when using port 1 s telephone wire there may be a problem with port 1 s original telephone wire Go to the next step Remove the port bonding group see section 25 3 29 Connect a DSL modem to the other end of the telephone wiring for the connection that was not transmitting If the port s DSL LED does not turn on there may be
187. gt lt group name gt lt group gt where lt mode gt Type 4w to physically bundle together two ports into an N wire group Type 8w to physically bundle together four ports into an N wire group You can bundle multiple groups of ports as long as they do not overlap lt group name gt The name of the n wire bundling group up to 31 characters lt group gt Specify which ports are to be members of this bundled n wire group With a 4 wire group type 4 for ports 7 and 8 3 for ports 5 and 6 2 for ports 3 and 4 or 1 for ports 1 and 2 You must configure 4 wire group 4 before group 3 and group 2 before group 1 Although you can configure groups 2 and 1 before configuring groups 4 and 3 1t is recommended that you configure 4 wire groups from higher numbers to lower numbers and delete them from lower numbers to higher numbers With an 8 wire group type 2 for ports 5 to 8 or 1 for ports 1 to 4 This command bundles the specified ports into an n wire group for the STU R SHDSL Termination Unit Remote One SAM1008 must be set to be the central side and the other must be set to be the remote side Configure both with the same number of ports set to connect to the other SAM1008 and n wire bundled Y ou can n wire bundle multiple groups of ports as long as they do not overlap One SAM1008 module can have both STU C and STU R groups Make sure that G SHDSL ports one through four are a
188. gured parameters and actual speed of a G SHDSL port 25 3 GSHDSL Commands Use these commands to configure a SAM 1008 s G SHDSL ports and profiles The commands related to one subsystem are grouped under a primary command of that subsystem To configure the G SHDSL parameters you must first enter the G SHDSL subsystem by entering the gshds1 command as shown next Syntax 192 168 1 1 gt gshdsl 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt When you see the 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt command line prompt you are ready to enter G SHDSL commands Enter the home command to return to the 192 168 1 1 gt prompt 25 3 1 Config Save Command Syntax G SHDSL Commands 25 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt config save This command saves the G SHDSL configuration into nonvolatile memory You must use this command to save any configurations that you make otherwise the IES 1000 will return to its default settings when it is restarted Do not turn off your IES 1000 while saving your configuration 25 3 2 Disable Port Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt disable port lt port gt where lt port gt A port number from 1 to 8 This command forcibly disables the specified G SHDSL port For ports that are part of an n wire group each n wire group has one master port and the others are slaves Enabling or disabling the master port enables or disables all of the ports in the n wire group You cannot enable or disable a slave port T
189. h they were created The factory default settings for the port based filter of the IES 1000 are Bridge port 1 Ethernet port allowed to all bridge ports Bridge port 2 DSL port 1 allowed to bridge port 1 Ethernet port only Bridge port 3 DSL port 2 allowed to bridge port 1 Ethernet port only Bridge port 4 DSL port 3 allowed to bridge port 1 Ethernet port only Bridge port 5 DSL port 4 allowed to bridge port 1 Ethernet port only Bridge port 6 DSL port 5 allowed to bridge port 1 Ethernet port only Bridge port 7 DSL port 6 allowed to bridge port 1 Ethernet port only Bridge port 8 DSL port 7 allowed to bridge port 1 Ethernet port only Bridge port 9 DSL port 8 allowed to bridge port 1 Ethernet port only The default port filter settings allow each DSL port to communicate back and forth with only the Ethernet port and not with other DSL ports The following figure illustrates this Getting Started Screens 10 5 IES 1000 User s Guide DSL 1 DSL 1 Ethernet i Ethernet _Ethernet y ee Se DSL 8 A DS a Figure 10 4 Default Port Filter Settings 10 5 1 Port Filter Setup Screen Click Port Filter in the Bridge Setup screen to open this screen Bridge Port Filter Setup Port Number Egress Port w E E E E E E E E Figure 10 5 Bridge Port Filter Setup The following table describes this screen Table 10 4 Bridge Port Filter Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION
190. he UDP port number of the external RADIUS server This command sets the external RADIUS server UDP port number 30 2 13 RADIUS Secret Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dotlx gt radius secret lt secret gt where lt secret gt A password up to 31 alphanumeric characters to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the IES 1000 This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the IES 1000 This command sets the authentication and encryption key 30 2 14 RADIUS Show Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dotlx gt radius show This command displays the external RADIUS server settings 30 4 IEEE 802 1X Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 31 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands This chapter generally describes the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN and associated CI Commands 31 1 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Introduction The IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN allows your network module to deliver tagged untagged frames to and from its ports The standard gives the network module the ability to recognize VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices and automatically strips tags from frames destined for ports that would normally drop tagged frames See the web configurator chapter on VLAN for more background information 31 2 Configuring the Tagged VLAN In a typical setup each DSL port is assigned a different VLAN ID VID to isolate the subscribers while the uplink port should be a member of every subscrib
191. he factory default of all ports is disabled A port must be enabled before data transmission can occur An enabled but disconnected SHDSL port generates more heat than an operating port To minimize heat generation and to enhance reliability remember to disable a port when it is not in use 25 3 3 Disable Ports Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt disable ports This command forcibly disables all G SHDSL ports 25 3 4 Enable Port Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt enable port lt port gt where lt port gt A port number from 1 to 8 This command forcibly enables the specified G SHDSL port For ports that are part of an n wire group each n wire group has one master port and the others are slaves Enabling or disabling the master port enables or disables all of the ports in the n wire group You cannot use the enable or disable commands ona slave port If you are using n wire and or port bonding and you changed the ports from the central side to the remote side or vice versa the system will process the change when you use the enable command This will take a few moments and the system appears to be hanging 25 2 G SHDSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide 25 3 5 Enable Ports Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt enable ports This command forcibly enables all G SHDSL ports 25 3 6 Lineinfo Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt lineinfo lt port gt where lt port gt A port number from 1 to
192. he multicast filtering database fpvid Displays default port VLAN IDs in Fast Mode lt portNo gt lt vid gt Sets a default port VLAN ID in Fast Mode macfilter Displays the MAC filtering status and setting on all ports lt portNo gt Displays the MAC filtering status and setting on the specified port enable lt portNo gt Enables the MAC filtering mechanism disable lt portNo gt Disables the MAC filtering mechanism add lt portNo gt lt mac gt Adds a source MAC address from which to forward packets delete lt portNo gt lt mac gt Deletes a source MAC address from which to forward packets maccount lt portNo gt Displays the system s current MAC address count filter settings for that port enable port Turns on the MAC address count filter disable port Turns off the MAC address count filter set lt port gt lt max 1 gt lt max 2 gt Sets the MAC address count filter version Displays bridge information buffer list Displays all buffer pools info Shows the current buffer pool s information lt poolName gt Sets the current buffer pool to lt poolName gt and shows the pool s information show Shows all buffers in the current buffer pool 22 4 Commands Introduction IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands
193. he name of the virtual channel profile up to 31 ASCII characters You cannot change the DEFVAL profile lt encap gt The type of encapsulation llc or ve lt aal gt The ATM Adaptation Layer aal0 aal3 aal4 or aal5 lt class gt The type of ATM traffic class cbr constant bit rate rt vbr real time variable bit rate nrt vbr non real time variable bit rate ubr unspecified bit rate or abr available bit rate lt pcr gt The Peak Cell Rate 0 to 300000 or the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells lt cdvt gt The accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay 0 to 255 or means 0 Virtual Channel Management 26 1 IES 1000 User s Guide lt scr mcr gt The Sustained Cell Rate scr sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted SCR applies with the rt vbr and nrt vbr traffic classes Minimum Cell Rate mcr is the minimum rate at which the sender can send cells MCR applies with the abr traffic class 0 to 300000 or to meet port speed lt bt nrm gt Burst Tolerance bt is the maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards BT applies with the rt vbr and nrt vbr traffic classes The Number of Resource Management nrm cells is the maximum number of cells a source may send for each forward Resource Management cell NRM applies with the abr traffic class 0 to 255 or means 0
194. he port to accept just tagged incoming frames on this Frame Type port Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link in the navigation panel on the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 9 2 ADSL Port Setup Edit Screen Click an ADSL port in the Port Setup screen to open this screen gt At the time of writing the GVRP check box is read only Enabling the VLAN automatically enables GVRP on the Ethernet port At the time of writing the VLAN Acceptable Frame Type field is read only The IES 1000 accepts both tagged and untagged incoming frames ADSL Module Port Setup 11 9 IES 1000 User s Guide Edit Pont Setup Port Number 1 Name T Active Default 802 1p Priority 0 Profile DEFVAL Mode Auto y 802 10 VLAN Default VLAN ID GVRP VLAN Acceptable Frame Type r 3 Apply Reset Figure 11 5 ADSL Port Setup Edit The following table describes this screen Table 11 6 ADSL Port Setup Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Channel Setup Click this link to go to the port s Channel Setup screen Port Setup Click this link to go to the Port Setup screen Name Type a descriptive name to identify the port Active Select this check
195. hone lines between MDF blocks 6 4 ADSL Port Connections The AAM1008 network module can provide ADSL and voice services over the same telephone wiring It also has built in splitters that save space and simplify installation The following figure gives an example of a basic installation scenario for using the AAM1008 to combine voice and data signals Hardware Connections 6 5 IES 1000 User s Guide O dl E L TF N aan a i w O LJL feasa A OO dl s FOO Ltt O L IOO arar ia y Pe a r arar Pa POTS e MPE z splitte ADSL Modem Figure 6 6 AAM1008 Installation Overview You can also use RJ 11 connectors on both ends of the telephone cables connect directly to an ADSL modem s or patch panel This chapter discusses connections using MDFs 6 4 1 Typical Scenarios Your existing telephone wiring usually depends on your region Here are descriptions of three typical installation scenarios See the Notes About MDFs Main Distribution Frames for more information about MDFs Use telephone wires with RJ 11 jacks on one end follow the pin assignments shown in the appendices for connecting to the AAM1008 6 4 2 Installation Scenario A You want to install the AAM1008 network module in an environment where there
196. iation Tolerance 13 5 Copyright ii Central Side Port Bonding Command 25 12 Customer Support v Certifications iii D Channel Attenuation 24 8 Default 802 1p Priority 11 10 12 8 13 3 13 7 13 9 Channel Statistics Command 26 7 150 Channels Statistics Command 26 8 Deru Galeway Moan Chassis 1 1 Default IP Address 33 2 Chassis ID 10 1 Default Profile Settings 11 2 12 3 CI Commands 22 2 Default Route 33 1 Clear Channel Command 26 9 DEB SS tines MES Clear Channels Command 26 9 Default VLAN ID 11 9 11 11 12 9 co 6 5 Defaults 2 2 COM1 6 1 Delete Channel Command 26 4 COM2 6 1 Delete Channels Command 26 5 C mmand Line interface 22 1 Delete N wire Group Command 25 14 Command Struct re 22 1 Delete Port Bonding Command 25 15 Commands introduction 22 1 Delete Profile Command 24 10 25 6 Community 34 1 Delete VCP Command 26 2 Config Command 33 2 Delete VCPs Command 26 3 Config Print Command 23 2 Device Command oe Config Save Command 22 2 24 1 25 1 28 1 DHCP PIG A Configuration DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 29 3 Backing up 35 1 DHCP Relay Commands 29 1 Restoring 35 1 Dimensions G Configuration Backup Restore 35 1 Digabis Channel Command a Configured Speed 25 1 Disable Channels Command 26 7 Configured Vs Actual Rate 24 1 Disable ott Goumnang O Configuring the Tagged VLAN 31 1 Disable Ports Command 24 2 25 2 J Index IES 1000 User s Guide Disclaimer ii Filterage Command 28 4 Display All G SHDSL Line Information 25 10 Filtering Database
197. igation panel and then Hardware Monitor in the Statistics screen to open the Hardware Monitor screen Use the hardware performance statistics for hardware troubleshooting Hardware Monitor Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status Temprature 32 33 31 70 Normal Poll Interval s 40 Set Interval Stop Figure 19 2 Hardware Monitor Table 19 2 Hardware Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION Temperature C The IES 1000 s temperature sensor is capable of detecting and reporting if the temperature rises above the threshold All temperature measurements are in degrees Celsius Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor Max This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor Min This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor 19 2 Statistics IES 1000 User s Guide Table 19 2 Hardware Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt the hardware monitor statistic polling on the IES 1000 19 2 2 Port Statistics Scree
198. ile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 802 1X Edit Screen Click 802 1X in the Bridge Setup screen to open the 802 1X Setup screen Click a port s index number in the 802 1X Setup screen to edit the port s IEEE 802 1X settings Edit 802 1X Setup ADSL1 T Active Control auto Reauthentication on y Reauthentication Timer eo SOS Apply Reset Figure 10 20 Edit 802 1X Setup Table 10 17 Edit 802 1x Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen 802 1X Setup Click this link to go to the 802 1X Setup screen Active Select this checkbox to turn on IEEE 802 1X authentication on this port Control Select Auto to authenticate all subscribers before they can access the network through this port Select Force Authorized to allow all connected users to access the network through this port without authentication Select Force Unauthorized to deny all subscribers access to the network through this port 10 20 Getting Started Screens IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 17 Edit 802 1x Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Reauthentication Select On if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauthentication Timer Specify how often 60 65535 seconds a subscriber has to re enter his or her username
199. iles including profiles for troubleshooting Profiles allow you to configure DSL ports efficiently You can configure all ofthe DSL ports with the same profile thus removing the need to configure the DSL ports one by one You can also change an individual DSL port by assigning it a different profile You could set up different profiles for different kinds of accounts for example economy standard and premium Assign the appropriate profile to a DSL port and it takes care of a large part of the port s configuration See later in this chapter for how to configure profiles You can only delete a profile when no DSL port is set to use it ADSL Module Port Setup 11 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 11 5 Interleave Delay Interleave delay is the wait in milliseconds that determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved assembled and then transmitted Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction Reed Solomon is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line The bigger the delay the bigger the data block size allowing better error correction to be performed Reed Solomon codes are block based error correcting codes with a wide range of applications The Reed Solomon encoder takes a block of digital data and adds extra redundant bits The Reed Solomon decoder processes each block and attempts to correct errors and recover the original data 11 5 1 Fast Mode Fast mode means no interleaving takes place an
200. imer stay connected to the port RADIUS Server Setup Screen Click 802 1X in the Bridge Setup screen to open the 802 1x Setup screen Click RADIUS Server in the 802 1x Setup screen to open this screen RADIUS Server Setup IP Address 192 168 1 254 UDP Port fi812 Shared Secret 1234 Apply Reset Figure 10 19 RADIUS Server Setup Table 10 16 RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen 802 1X Click this link to go to the 802 1x Setup screen IP Address Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Getting Started Screens 10 19 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 16 RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the IES 1000 This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the IES 1000 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volat
201. ineinfo Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt lineinfo lt port number gt where lt port number gt A port number from to 8 The 1ineinfo command shows the line operating values of an ADSL port An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 adsl gt lineinfo 7 Current Operating Modes Data Mode ATM Service Type in operation G DMT Number of Channels Down up stream 1 1 Downstream Framing Structure 3 Active down up stream rate option 1 1 TRELLIS operation mode is ON Current Connection detail Down up stream interleaved Delay 4 4 ms Downstream Parity byte assigned to fast interleaved Upstream Parity byte assigned to fast interleaved Downstream Symbols assigned to fast interleaved Upstream Symbols assigned to fast interleaved Down up stream Depth value y 2 2 Total Transceiver Output Power 8dB Current ATUR Information Country code 0 Provider Code 01020304 Capabilities g dmt POTS overlap Annex A Figure 24 2 Lineinfo Command Example 24 4 ADSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide The results contain the operating modes interleave delay parity byte assignment and parity bytes per codeword symbols per codeword and interleave depth Information obtained prior to training to steady state transition will not be valid or will be old information Annex A refers to POTS Table 24 1 Lineinfo Command LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Type in Operation This is the ADSL standard that the port
202. information on the 10 100M auto sensing Ethernet ports 271 2 Ethernet Commands Use these commands to configure a network module s Ethernet port 27 2 1 Set Auto Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ethernet gt set auto lt on off gt where lt on off gt on or off This command sets the auto negotiation of the Ethernet port to either on or off 27 2 2 Set Duplex Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ethernet gt set duplex lt mode gt where lt mode gt full or half This command sets the duplex mode used when auto negotiation is turned off 27 23 Set Speed Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ethernet gt set speed lt speed gt where 10 100M Fast Ethernet Port Commands 27 1 IES 1000 User s Guide lt speed gt 100r100 This command sets the connection speed used when auto negotiation is turned off 10 stands for 10Mbps and 100 stands for 100Mbps 27 2 4 Status Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 ethernet gt status This command shows the current status of the Ethernet port 27 2 10 100M Fast Ethernet Port Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 28 Bridge Commands This chapter discusses the bridge subsystem It allows you to configure and monitor the bridging configure MAC filters port based VLANs port filter and tagged frame functions of the IES 1000 28 1 Bridge Commands Overview See the web configurator Getting Started Screens chapter for background information on the IES 1000 s bridge
203. ing Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance CDVT is the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay CDVT controls the time scale over which the PCR is enforced CDVT is used to determine if a cell arrived too early in relation to PCR Virtual Channel Management 13 5 IES 1000 User s Guide Burst Tolerance BT Burst Tolerance BT is the maximum number of cells that the port is guaranteed to handle without any discards BT controls the time scale over which the SCR is enforced BT is used to determine if a cell arrived too early in relation to SCR Use this formula to calculate BT MBS 1 x 1 SCR 1 PCR BT Theoretical Arrival Time TAT The Theoretical Arrival Time TAT is when the next cell in an ATM connection s stream of cells is expected to arrive TAT is calculated based on the PCR or SCR The following figure illustrates the relationship between TAT CDVT and BT If a cell arrives at time A then according to PCR or SCR the next cell is expected to arrive at time B If the next cell arrives earlier than time C it is discarded or tagged for not complying with the TAT Time C is calculated based on the CDVT or BT TAT Cell Time A C B CDVT BT Figure 13 3 TAT CDVT and BT in Traffic Shaping 13 4 3 DSL Port VC Profile Setup Screen Do the follow
204. ing to open the VC Profile screen Step 1 Click a DSL port s index number in the Port Setup screen to go to the DSL Port Setup screen Step 2 Click Channel Setup in the DSL Port Setup screen to go to the Channel Setup screen Step 3 Click VC Profile in the Channel Setup screen to open the VC Profile screen 13 6 Virtual Channel Management IES 1000 User s Guide VC Profile Setup Profile Name Encap AAL Class PCR CDvT oe Nay Delete DEFVAL lle aal5 ubr DEFVAL_VC ve aal5 ubr ri le aal ubr a w E Add Delete Figure 13 4 DSL Port VC Profile Setup Table 13 2 DSL Port VC Profile Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Channel Setup Click this link to go to the Channel Setup screen Profile Name This name identifies the profile Encap This field displays the type of encapsulation LLC or VC AAL This field displays the ATM Adaptation Layer AAL Class This field displays the type of ATM traffic class cbr constant bit rate rt vbr real time variable bit rate nrt vbr non real time variable bit rate ubr unspecified bit rate or abr available bit rate PCR This is the Peak Cell Rate PCR the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells CDVT This field displays the accepted tolerance of the difference between a cell s transfer delay and the expected transfer delay SCR MCR The Sustained Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitte
205. into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one group A station can belong to more than one group With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLANs also increase network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Note that VLANs are unidirectional they only govern outgoing traffic 15 2 Tagged VLANs IEEE 802 1Q When a LAN bridge receives a frame from a workstation the VLAN from whence it came must be known so the bridge may respond if necessary to the source of the frame This is accomplished by tagging There are two kinds of tagging 1 Explicit Tagging e A VLAN identifier is added to the frame header that identifies the source VLAN 2 Implicit Tagging e The MAC Media Access Control number the port or other information is used to identify the source of a VLAN frame The IEEE 802 1Q Tagged
206. ion The Integrated Ethernet Switch can add information to client TCP IP configuration requests that it relays to a DHCP server This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests You can also specify additional information for the Integrated Ethernet Switch to add to the client TCP IP configuration requests that it relays to the DHCP server Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details 10 5 10 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub option Format The DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client TCP IP configuration request frames that the Integrated Ethernet Switch relays to a DHCP server The Agent Information field that the Integrated Ethernet Switch adds contains an Agent Circuit ID sub option that includes the slot ID port number VLAN ID and optional information about the port where the TCP IP configuration request was received The following figure shows the format of the Agent Circuit ID sub option The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub option If the configuration request was received on a network module s port a 1 byte Slot ID field specifies the slot location of the network module in the Integrated Ethernet Switch and a 1 byte Port No field specifies the ingress port number The next field is 2 bytes and displays the DHCP request packet s VLAN ID The last field A can range from 0 to 24 bytes and is optional infor
207. is port The minimum G SHDSL line speed you configured The actual G SHDSL line speed in Kbps 25 4 G SHDSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Mode This field displays which port bonding or n wire mode the port is set to use Normal displays when the port is not part of an n wire group 2 wire displays when the port is part of a port bonding group but not part ofan n wire group 4 wire displays when the port is part of a 4 wire n wire group 8 wire displays when the port is part of an 8 wire n wire group C stands for the central side and R stands for the remote side Each n wire group has one master port and the others are slaves Enabling or disabling the master port enables or disables all of the ports in the n wire group You cannot use the enable or disable commands on a slave port Failed displays when the system was unable to download firmware to the DSL chipset Dropped displays when the port is a member of a bonded group but was dropped because it could not connect within at least 640 Kbps of the rate of the other bonded ports Both the central and remote sides of the connection must disable and re enable the dropped port to attempt to bring up the connection again Bonding This field displays Yes when the port is a member of a port bonding group No displays for a port that is not a member of a port bonding group PSD This is the port s Power Spectral
208. is profile Speeds from 32 to 8160 Kbps are supported Min Rate Kbps Type the minimum downstream transfer rate from 32 to 8160 Kbps for this profile Configure the minimum downstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum downstream transfer rate Latency Delay ms Configure this field when you set the Latency Mode field to interleave Type the number of milliseconds 0 255 of interleave delay to use for upstream transfers It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both upstream and downstream Max SNR db Type the maximum downstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Min SNR db Type the minimum downstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the minimum downstream signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin Target SNR db Type the target downstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the target downstream signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the minimum downstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum downstream signal to noise margin Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this
209. it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring VLAN ID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN Click an entry s VLAN ID to go to a screen where you can edit that VLAN Name This field displays the name of this VLAN Active This field displays Yes when the entry is activated and No when the entry is empty Add Click this button to configure a new VLAN Delete Select a VLAN s s Delete check box and click the Delete button to remove the VLAN 15 8 1 Add or Edit VLAN Static Entry Screen Click VLAN Setup in the navigation panel and then Add or a VLAN ID in the VLAN Setup screen Use this menu to set up IEEE 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the IES 1000 Add VLAN Static Entry VLAN ID 0 Name F Active Port Number 0 normal G fixed Q forbidden O Tx Tagging Vv Port Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 normal G ce Ce Ce Ce Ce G O fixed Cc C C E C O C forbidden O O O C C Cc C Tx Tagging iv Vv v Vv Y iv V iv Apply Reset Figure 15 2 Add VLAN Static Entry VLAN 15 5 IES 1000 User s Guide The following table describes this screen Table 15 3 Add VLAN Static Entry LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Setup Click this link to go to the Static VLAN Setup screen VLAN ID This is the ID number of VLAN group index number you clicked in the
210. k module Warm Start Trap WARN The network module restarted as a result of a reboot command Cold Start Trap WARN The network module started Core Dump WARN The error log is not kept after a restart When the network module restarts due to a software level error you can use config save in order to create a core file Send the core file to customer support for analysis THERMO OVER RANGE WARN The temperature detected in the network module was too high dev lt device id gt value lt temp gt lt temp gt temperature when the entry was logged 20 4 Diagnostics IES 1000 User s Guide Table 20 3 Log Messages LOG MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION THERMO RELEASE OVER WARN The temperature detected in the network module has come back to RANGE dev lt device id gt normal lue lt gt VARO lt temp gt temperature when the entry was logged Insecure Telnet From WARN Someone tried to start a Telnet session from the listed IP address lt ip addr gt and it did not match any of the configured secured client IP addresses Incorrect Telnet WARN Someone attempted to use the wrong password to start a Telnet Password session Telnet Session Begin INFO A Telnet session has started Telnet Session End INFO A Telnet session has terminated 20 3 2 DSL Line Diagnostic Screen Click DSL in the Diagnostic screen to open the DSL Line Diagnostic screen Use this
211. l a Sadat asa devant Ds a ela sacle tabs a e a a ota sa sseet 15 3 135 7 VEAN Setups cee E A bea Sees Weta T tee drid 15 4 15 8 Static VLAN Setup A NN 15 4 Chapter 16 SNMP cocacola ti ltda 16 1 16 1 SNMP Manar Md iii 16 1 16 2 SNMP Setup a S 16 3 Ghapter K gt LOMA aa 17 1 T71 Logins OVerva CW Lt td AA A AA eE EA E EEE 17 1 17 2 Logins SOLED sases5 cas ia tae sass sa A A dd 17 1 Chapter 18 Maintenance iio A dae eae 18 1 18 1 Maintenance Overview A RAN 18 1 18 21 MaintenanGe Screen ox sxcevserssi cco A A e 18 1 Ghapter19 Statistics aan ii at leet caus tale a lola eel A 19 1 19 1 Statistics OVerVie Winnie cd 19 1 LD ESTAIS CN La ed e ld e a O DA 19 1 Chapter 20 Diagnostic al dd tds 20 1 201 Diagnosi OVA 20 1 20 2 RSS a E a E a a e Ea AE RA Ea aA a aS 20 1 20 3 Log Fortuna EEE E E 20 2 20 EO SOUL SC EEN iTr cease san tenes NEE A a Ea 20 6 Ghapter 21 Troubleshooting irse a ara AA a el a 21 1 211 DELE Si A A a E ee a E A Ss 21 1 22 Data Transmission A a iie n a a a a a a a RE 21 1 21 3 DSL CED T m On and Of rile aiee arkena iaee iba 21 2 ZA Data Rate A A a a A iai e i 21 2 21 5 Port Bonding ida arias des 21 2 X Table of Contents IES 1000 User s Guide 21 6 Configured Settings cccceccecsccsscesseeeseeeseeeeeeseeceecsaecesecesecesecsseesseeseeeeeseceseceseeessecsaecsaecaeceseceseeeaeenes 21 2 DAE PassWord A A e 21 2 2S SEVER deea ashes Sotensae REN RAN 21 3 DAO SN MB E AA Dia AN
212. le refer to sections 25 3 19 and 24 3 24 Also make sure that it is using RFC 1483 encapsulation bridge mode and LLC based multiplexing Make sure that the network module s IP settings are configured properly refer to Chapter 33 Check the VLAN configuration of the network module refer to Chapter 28 Check the Ethernet type filter configuration refer to 28 5 6 Check the IEEE 802 1X port based authentication configuration refer to 30 2 3 Ping the network module from the subscriber s computer NI OO oa AJOIN If you cannot ping connect a DSL modem to a DSL port that is known to work on the same network module If the DSL modem or router works with a different DSL port there may be a problem with the original port Contact the distributor If using a different port does not work try a different DSL modem or router with the original port Troubleshooting 37 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 37 3 SHDSL or ADSL LED s Turn On and Off An SHDSL or ADSL LED turns on and off intermittently Table 37 3 Troubleshooting a Non Constant DSL LED STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Use the lineinfo command with G SHDSL refer to 25 3 6 or the 1inerate command with ADSL refer to 24 3 9 to check the subscriber s telephone wiring 2 Connect a DSL modem directly to the DSL port of the network module using a different telephone wire If the DSL LED still turns on and off repeat
213. le from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 16 1 1 Supported MIBs The IES 1000 supports MIB II defined in RFC 1213 and RFC 1215 The IES 1000 can also respond with specific data from the ZyXEL private MIBs zyxel mib zyxel AS mib zyxel AS ATM mib zyxel AESCommon mib and zyxel SESCommon mib MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance 16 1 2 Supported Traps The network module supports the following traps coldStart Trap defined in RFC 1215 This trap is sent at system start up authenticationFailure Trap defined in RFC 1215 This trap is sent if a request arrives with an invalid community string linkUp Trap defined in RFC 1215 This trap is sent when a DSL port is up linkDown Trap defined in RFC 1215 This trap is sent when a DSL port is down overheat Trap defined in ZYXEL MIB This trap is sent periodically when a network module is overheated overheatOver Trap defined in ZY XEL MIB This trap is sent when the network module is no longer overheated 16 2 SNMP IES 1000 User s Guide 16 2 SNMP Setup Screen Click SNMP in the navigation panel to open the SNMP screen Snmp Setup Trust Host Community Access Right Send Trap Delete 0 0 0 0 1234 Write No B
214. lect 4 wire or 8 wire in the Mode field the screen displays the available 4 or 8 wire groups You must have already configured the 4 or 8 wire groups in the Add G SHDSL N wire Group screen and the groups cannot be members of another port bonding group Select the member groups for this port bonding group Configure the groups on both ends of a connection with the same number of 4 or 8 wire groups Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link in the navigation panel on the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 12 12 G SHDSL Module Port Setup IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 13 Virtual Channel Management This chapter shows you how to configure virtual channels The configuration of virtual channels is the same for both the AAM1008 and SAM1008 network modules 13 1 About Virtual Channels Defining channels also called Permanent Virtual Circuits or PVCs allows you to set priorities for different services or subscribers You can define up to eight channels on each DSL port and use them for different services or levels of service You set the PVID that is assigned to untagged frames received on each channel You also set an IEEE 802 1p priority for each of the PVIDs In this way you can assi
215. lick this link to go to the VC Profile Setup screen 13 2 Virtual Channel Management IES 1000 User s Guide Table 13 1 DSL Port Channel Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Port Setup Click this link to go to the Edit Port Setup screen Port Setup Click this link to go to the Port Setup screen VPI VCI This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Circuit Identifier VCI The VPI and VCI identify a channel on this port Click a link in the VPI VCI column to open a screen where you can edit the VPI VCI settings Active This field shows whether the channel is turned on Yes or not No PVID This is the PVID Port VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this channel An asterisks denotes a super channel Priority Type the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag An asterisks denotes a super channel VC Profile This shows which VC profile the channel is set to use Add Click this button to configure a new channel Delete Select a channel s Delete check box and click the Delete button to remove the channel 13 3 ATM Qos ATM Quality of Service QoS mechanisms provide the best service on a per flow guarantee ATM network infrastructure was designed to provide QoS It uses fixed cell sizes and built in traffic management see the following section on traffic shaping This allows you
216. ll the same end of their connections all STU C or all STU R G SHDSL Commands 25 11 IES 1000 User s Guide Make sure that G SHDSL ports five through eight are all the same end of their connections all STU C or all STU R G SHDSL ports one through four do not need to be set to be the same end of the connection as G SHDSL ports five through eight For example G SHDSL ports one through four could be set to be STU C while G SHDSL ports five through eight are set to be STU R The following example sets an STU R 8 wire mode 4 ports group with the name N wire B for ports 1 to 4 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set nwirer 8w N wire B 1 Make sure you set all of the ports in an n wire group to have the same PVID see section 31 3 3 PVID Command If the ports are enabled and you change them from central side to remote side or vice versa all ports are set to the central side by default the system will take a few moments to process the change If the ports are not enabled the processing occurs when you enable them During this processing the system appears to be hanging 25 3 24 Set Central Side Port Bonding Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set bondc lt bond name gt lt port list gt or 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set bondc lt mode gt lt bond name gt lt group list gt where lt bond name gt The name of the bonding group up to 31 characters lt port list gt Two to eight G SHDSL ports lt mode gt Type 4w t
217. lls This field shows the number of ATM cells received by this port on this individual channel Poll The field displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh Interval s interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set Interval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling on the IES 1000 Start Port Use these fields to have the screen display channel statistics for a range of ports that you specify End Port Select a beginning port number in a range of ports in the Start Port field and an ending port number in the End Port field Click Set Range to have the screen display channel statistics for the Set Range S range of ports that you specified Clear Click Clear to reset this IES 1000 s statistic records 19 2 4 VLAN Status Screen Click Statistics in the navigation panel and then VLAN Status in the Statistics screen to open this screen These fields describe the status of the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Statistics 19 5 IES 1000 User s Guide VLAN Status Index VID Egress Port Untagged Port Elapsed Time Status E12345678 E12345678 000 07 3307 99 static 40 Set Interval Previous Page Next Page Stop Poll Interval s Figure 19 5 VLAN Status The following table describes this screen Table 19 5 VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the VLAN index number VID This is the VLAN ID number configured in the Edit Static
218. log is sent if lt mode gt enable To display current settings do not specify a lt mode gt 23 5 2 Syslog Facility Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt syslog facility lt facility gt where lt facility gt Local 1 to local 7 This command sets the syslog facility for the UNIX system 23 5 3 Syslog Server Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt syslog server lt server IP gt where lt server IP gt The IP address of syslog server System Commands 23 5 IES 1000 User s Guide This command sets the UNIX server IP address If lt server IP gt 0 0 0 0 default then logs will be dropped not be sent 23 6 System Error Log Commands The system error log will record error events locally to the IES 1000 memory You may clear or display these logs using the commands listed in this section The following lists some examples of logs that the system error log can record Please refer to the web configurator Diagnostic chapter for log details ADSL link on port number sequence number rate noise margin attenuation ADSL OVER_HEAT_ACTIVE temperature G SHDSL link on port number sequence number rate noise margin attenuation G SHDSL OVER_HEAT_ACTIVE temperature Console session begin Telnet session begin Incorrect telnet password FTP session begin Incorrect FTP password FTP image error reason System reboot 23 6 1 Errlog Display Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt errlog dis
219. make a large FTP file transfer it would be faster to use two FTP clients When using multiple G SHDSL ports to connect two SAM1008s it is recommended that you bond all of the G SHDSL ports to avoid network loops and improve throughput 12 2 G SHDSL Module Port Setup IES 1000 User s Guide 12 7 Default GSHDSL Module Settings The default profile always exists and all ofthe G SHDSL ports use the default profile settings when the network module is shipped The default profile s name is set to DEFVAL The default profile can t be deleted 12 7 1 Default G SHDSL Module Profile Settings The following are the settings of the default profile Name DEFVAL Profile Status Active gt Maximum 2034 Kbps gt Minimum 192 Kbps 12 7 2 Other Default GSHDSL Module Settings The factory default settings for all G SHDSL ports of the network module are gt Encapsulation RFC 1483 gt Multiplexing LLC based gt VPI 0 gt VCI 33 gt Enable Disable State disabled 12 8 GSHDSL Module Port Setup Screen Click Port Setup in the navigation panel to open the Port Setup screen This screen is a summary screen that displays read only information about the ports Click a port s name to go to a setup screen for that port GSHDSL Module Port Setup 12 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Pon Setup Por Number Active Auto Neg Speed Duplex ves ves NIA NIA Port Max Rate Min Rate h Nuha Active Name Profile Kbps kbps PS
220. mation that you specify about this relay agent Es Ja Figure 10 14 DHCP Relay Agent Circuit ID Sub option Format ar so a te wo wr Linn Getting Started Screens 10 15 IES 1000 User s Guide 10 5 11 DHCP Relay Screen Click DHCP Relay in the Bridge Setup screen to open this screen DHCP Relay Setup l DHCP Relay Enable TT Relay Agent Information Option Enable Relay Agent Information Apply DHCP server address Delete 10 0 0 1 E Add Delete Figure 10 15 DHCP Relay Setup Table 10 13 DHCP Relay Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen DHCP Relay Enable DHCP relay to have the Integrated Ethernet Switch relay client TCP IP configuration Enable requests to a DHCP server and the server s responses back to the clients Relay Agent A information Select this check box to have the Integrated Ethernet Switch add the originating slot and Option Enable port numbers to client TCP IP configuration requests that it relays to a DHCP server Relay Agent Information Use this field to specify up to 24 ASCII characters of additional information for the Integrated Ethernet Switch to add to the DHCP client TCP IP configuration requests that it relays to a DHCP server Examples of information you could add would be the chassis number of the Integrated Ethernet Switch or the ISP s name DHCP server There are the
221. memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring MAC Address This field lists the MAC addresses that are set for this port Add Click this button to add the MAC address in the edit box to the list in the list box Delete Select a MAC address in the list box and click this button to delete the MAC address from the list Bridge MAC Filter Entry Add Screen Click Add in the Bridge MAC Filter Setup screen to open this screen Bridge MAC Filter Entry Add Ethernet Add MAC Address Apply Reset Figure 10 9 Bridge MAC Filter Entry Add The following table describes this screen Table 10 8 Bridge MAC Filter Entry Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Setup Click this link to go to the Bridge Setup screen Bridge MAC Click this link to go to the Bridge MAC Filter Setup screen Filter Setup Bridge MAC Click this link to go to the Bridge MAC Filter Entry List screen Filter Entry List Add MAC Type a MAC address in hexadecimal notation xx xx xx xx xx xx where x is a number from Address 0 to 9 or a letter from a to f in this field The MAC address cannot be a multicast or broadcast address Then click Apply Getting Started Screens 10 9 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 8 Bridge MAC Filter Entry Add LAB
222. n Click Statistics in the navigation panel and then Port Statistics in the Statistics screen to open this screen Use this screen to check status and performance data about the IES 1000 s ports System up Time 000 07 30 50 D D 5 Link State TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxBis RxBis UpTime 000 00 00 00 down disable 0 0 o o 0 down disable o oO o o o 000 00 00 00 down disable 0 0 o o 0 000 00 00 00 down disable 0 0 0 0 o o00 00 00 00 down disable 0 0 0 0 0 1000 00 00 00 down disable 0 0 0 0 0 1000 00 00 00 down disable o o o o o 000 00 00 00 down disable o o 0 0 0 000 00 00 00 1100M Full lenable 3075 1667099 665 54 Poll Interval s 40 set Interval Stop 10157 000 07 30 43 Figure 19 3 Port Statistics Table 19 3 Port Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION System up Time This field shows how long the system has been running since the last time it was started Port This identifies the DSL or Ethernet lan port Link This field shows the upstream downstream speeds of the DSL connections that are up or Down for the DSL ports that are not connected The field for the Ethernet port displays the speed and the duplex Take 100M Full as an example the 100M represents a speed of 100Mbps and the Full is for full duplex Statistics 19 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 19 3 Port Statistics
223. n about the IES 1000 and to access other screens with more detailed statistical information Statistics System Name FAN Version 2 04 DJ 3300 MAC Address 00 a0 05 12 34 57 IP Address 172 21 100 123 IP Mask 255 255 0 0 ADSL Driver Modem Code Version 1 1 AC5 AnnexB 3 80 patch Hardware Monitor Port Statistics Channel Statistics Vian Status Figure 19 1 Statistics The following table describes this screen Table 19 1 Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This is the IES 1000 system name assigned in General Setup F W Version This field refers to the version of the firmware MAC Address This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the IES 1000 IP Address This is the IP address of the IES 1000 in dotted decimal notation IP Mask This shows the IP mask of the IES 1000 Statistics 19 1 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 19 1 Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION DSL Driver This field displays the version of DSL driver and modem code Modem Code Conversion Hardware Monitor Click this button to display temperature statistics Port Statistics Click this button to display statistics for the ports Channel Statistics Click this button to display statistics for the channels on this DSL module s ports VLAN Status Click here to display 802 1Q VLAN statistics 19 2 1 Hardware Monitor Screen Click Statistics in the nav
224. n in charge of this IES 1000 Name Chassis ID Type a chassis ID number from 1 to 64 The chassis ID helps to keep track of this individual unit in a multiple unit application Getting Started Screens 10 1 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 1 General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Slot ID Type 1 or 2 for the slot ID number The slot ID helps keep track of this individual network module Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 3 Bridge Overview The IES 1000 supports IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging but not the static filtering feature or spanning tree protocol The bridge learns the source MAC addresses of sender hosts by inspecting incoming Ethernet frames and recording the learned MAC addresses with their incoming port numbers into its filtering database Based on the database the bridge forwards each incoming frame to its destination port 10 4 Bridge Setup Screen Click Bridge Setup in the navigation panel to open this screen 10 2 Getting Started Screens IES 1000 User s Guide Bridge Setup Operating Mode Bridge Mode Normal gt Apply Normal Mode Setting
225. n specify arbitrary numbers for port speeds using the set profile command the SAM1008 port speed is always adjusted to be a multiple of 32 Kbps See 25 2 Configured Versus Actual Speed and the examples shown next Speed Configuration Example 1 The configuration 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set profile economy 2000 200 sets the speed for the economy profile between 1984 and 192 Kbps Speed Configuration Example 2 This example sets the speed of the economy profile at 768 Kbps 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set profile economy 800 800 25 3 11 Delete Profile Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt delete profile lt name gt where lt name gt The profile name The delete profile command allows you to delete an individual profile by its name 25 3 12 List Profiles Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt list profiles The list profiles command displays all of the configured G SHDSL profiles and which G SHDSL ports are assigned to each 25 6 G SHDSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide An example is shown next This display shows that there are two profiles DEFVAL and gold and that port 3 belongs to the gold profile while ports 1 2 4 5 6 7 and 8 belong to the DEFVAL profile 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt list profiles ile contents Cmax Cmin PSD region 2304 192 annexB 2048 192 annexB AAYNnDUPWNHE Figure 25 2 List Profiles Command Example 25 3 13 Show Profile Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt show pr
226. n the PVID table To display the PVID table simply enter this command without parameters as shown next 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt pvid port pvid ii 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 31 1 Example PVID Command Display Make sure you set all bonded ports to have the same PVID 31 3 4 SVLAN CPU Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt svlan cpu lt vid gt where lt vid gt A VLAN ID Valid parameter range 1 4094 This command registers your CPU as a port member of the static VLAN with lt vid gt To display the CPU static VLAN identification simply enter this command without parameters as shown next 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan cpu 31 3 5 SVLAN List Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan list 31 4 IEEE 802 1QTagged VLAN Commands IES 1000 User s Guide This command displays the static VLAN registration table The following figure is an example of what is displayed when you use this command 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt svlan list ad_control tag_control untag untag untag untag untag untag untag untag Figure 31 2 Example SVLAN List Command Display For more information about the Svlan List command display refer to the Svlan Setentry command shown next 31 3 6 SVLAN Setentry Command 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt svlan setentry lt vid gt lt port gt lt ad_control gt Syntax lt tag_control gt where lt vid gt lt port gt lt ad_control gt lt tag_contr
227. n the network module Quit FTP For example ftp gt quit Wait for the update to finish The network module will restart automatically Do not turn off the IES 1000 during the updating process as it may corrupt the firmware and make your unit unusable 36 2 BOOTP TFTP Firmware Recovery of the Network Module The network modules use BOOTP TFTP for firmware recovery through their built in BOOTP TFTP client when the network modules are restarted To recover the firmware first download it from the ZyXEL web site and store it on your computer You can use any BOOTP TFTP server for example BootpTftp exe to update the network module s firmware The update procedure for BootpTftp exe is as follows Do not turn off the IES 1000 during the updating process as it may corrupt the firmware and make your unit unusable Connect your network module s LAN port to a computer s LAN port directly using a crossover Ethernet cable or connect both to an Ethernet hub switch using straight through cables Connect your network module s console port to a computer s serial port with a console cable Run any terminal emulation program for example Windows built in HyperTerminal with the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control 36 2 Firmware Upload and Recovery IES 1000 User s Guide 4 Run BootpTftp exe to bring up the following window Click New to
228. nable lt if gt mtu lt size gt lt ip gt Sets the IP address setting of the lt ipmask gt specified interface device list Lists interface definitions add lt if gt lt type gt lt file gt mtu Adds a new interface lt size gt lt IP gt mask lt mask gt delete lt if gt Deletes the specified interface flush Deletes all interfaces enable lt if gt Enables the specified interface disable lt if gt Disables the specified interface ping lt host gt ttl size Does a ping test route Displays all routing entries add lt routeName gt lt ip gt lt relayIp gt Adds a routing entry lt mask gt lt cost gt lt timeout gt 11 delete lt routeName gt Deletes a routing entry flush Deletes all routing entries routes Shows all routing entries stats help Shows the help information about the stats command arp reset Shows or resets the ARP statistics icmp reset Shows or resets the ICMP statistics ip reset Shows or resets the IP statistics raw reset Shows or resets the raw statistics tcp reset Shows or resets the TCP statistics udp reset Shows or resets the UDP statistics subnet add lt netName gt lt if gt lt ip gt lt mask gt Creates a subnet Commands Introduction 22 15 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION delete lt netN
229. nce received including interference that may cause undesired operations FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning Sears rere ASB Salen EE EAI AAA APSR RTS Estela E GAS Se a e e e Certifications Step 1 Go to www zyxel com Step 2 Select your product from the drop down list box on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page Step 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page Interference Statements and Warnings iii IES 1000 User s Guide ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in
230. nection Since n wire mode occurs at the physical level and port bonding occurs at the software level you can combine n wire bundled groups as well as individual ports This can give increased bandwidth in LAN to LAN applications between IES 1000s You can easily select G SHDSL ports or n wire bundled groups to bond together The IES 1000 checks the transfer rates of the individual G SHDSL ports when they connect The IES 1000 retrains any of the bonded ports that have a lower speed up to three times in an attempt to get them to reach the higher speed If a port does not reach the higher speed or at least within a 640 Kbps tolerance of the higher speed by the third attempt that port is dropped You can bond multiple groups of ports on a single IES 1000 or even within a single SAM1008 module as long as they do not overlap 12 6 N wire Mode with Port Bonding Example The following figure shows a SAM1008 s ports one to four and five to eight physically bundled into 8 wire groups and 2 respectively These two 8 wire bundled groups are then bonded into a single logical connection 3 in the figure ASE aor B 75 s OO 2 a 4 5 7 8 conso an 400 ie O OO A Ts 46 1 2 3 Figure 12 1 N wire Mode with Port Bonding Example With eight ports bundled together use multiple TCP connections in order to reach the higher speeds This is due to the limiting characteristics of a single TCP session For example if you need to
231. nels in all ports or in the specified ports vcp lt profile name gt Shows the contents of the specific VC profile vcps Shows the contents of all VC profiles list port lt portNo gt Shows the port configuration of the specified ADSL port ports Shows the port configurations for all ADSL ports profiles Shows all profiles and profiles applied to all ADSL ports getname lt portNo gt Gets the name of the specified port getnames Gets the names of all ports setname lt portNo gt lt name gt Sets the name of the specified port Commands Introduction 22 11 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION loopback lt portNo gt local f5 Does a local OAM F5 loopback test on the specified GSHDSL port stat ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Shows the statistics of the specified PVC channel chs lt start port gt lt end port gt Shows the statistics of all PVC channels in all ports or in the specified port clear ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Clears the statistics of the specified PVC channel chs lt start port gt lt end port gt Clears the statistics of all PVC channels in all ports or in the specified port gshdsl The gshdsI commands apply to the SAM module config save Saves configuration of GSHDSL module to nonvolatile memory enable ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Enables the specified PVC channel
232. nfiguration requests that it relays to a DHCP server Examples of information you could add would be the name of the Integrated Ethernet Switch or the ISP The relayinfo add command adds the specified information for the relay agent 29 4 DHCP Relay Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 30 IEEE 802 1X Commands This chapter describes how to use the dot1x commands 30 1 IEEE 802 1X Overview The IES 1000 supports IEEE 802 1X port based authentication refer to the web configurator part for background information 30 2 IEEE 802 1X Commands Use these commands to configure the IEEE 802 1X feature 30 2 1 Enable Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dot1x gt enable This command turns on the IEEE 802 1X security feature 30 2 2 Disable Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dot1x gt disable This command turns off the IEEE 802 1X security feature 30 2 3 Status Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dot1x gt status This command displays the current status of the IEEE 802 1X security feature 30 2 4 Debug Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dotlx gt debug level IEEE 802 1X Commands 30 1 IES 1000 User s Guide where level Use to turn on the packet debug level This has the IES 1000 display the contents of EAPOL Extensible Authentication Protocol Over LAN frames This can help you determine whether or not the subscriber is sending IEEE 802 1X packets If necessary customer support may instruct you to
233. ng command 192 168 1 1 bridge gt portfilter Port 1 ethernet all Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 6 7 8 9 BRI 3 12 98 2 Port Port Port Port PRPRPPRPRPER 3 14 Lb 6 7 8 Figure 28 3 Portfilter Command Example 2 The following figures illustrate the above example Notice that ports 2 DSL port 1 and 3 DSL port 2 are able to communicate with each other as well as with the Ethernet All of the other ports will only be able to communicate with the Ethernet port The following figure illustrates the 192 168 1 1 bridge gt portfilter 2 1 3 command line Port 2 DSL port 1 is able to send to both the Ethernet port and port 3 DSL port 2 ae Ethernet 4 DSL 2 Figure 28 4 Example of Modified Port Filter Port 2 The following figure illustrates the 192 168 1 1 bridge gt portfilter 3 1 2 command line Port 3 DSL port 2 is able to send to both the Ethernet port and port 2 DSL port 1 28 6 Bridge Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Ethemet t Figure 28 5 Example of Modified Port Filter Port 3 The following figure illustrates that port 1 the Ethernet port is linked to ports 2 DSL port 1 and 3 DSL port 2 Ports 2 DSL port1 and 3 DSL port 2 are also linked to each other Or in other words the following figure is a result of the following commands 192 168 1 1 bridge gt portfilter 2 1 3 192 168 1 1 bridge gt portfilter 3 1 2 AA L 1 oa DSL 1 x Ethernet
234. nge 1 4094 This command displays an entry with a specified VLAN ID in dynamic GVRP table Display a Dynamic VLAN Table Entry Example The following figure is an example display of the following command 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt dvlan getentry 2 Figure 31 7 Example DVLAN Getentry 2 Command Display In the figure above denotes filter and gt gt denotes forward 31 3 11 VLAN List Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt vlan list This command displays the entire VLAN table The display refreshes periodically Press ENTER and then enter the stop command to stop the display from refreshing The following figure is an example what is displayed when you use this command IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 31 9 IES 1000 User s Guide Figure 31 8 Example VLAN List Command Display In the figure above O denotes egress port V denotes tagged and X denotes untagged 31 10 IEEE 802 1QTagged VLAN Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 32 IEEE 802 1p Priority Commands This chapter explains IEEE 802 1p Priority CI Commands 32 1 Introduction IEEE 802 1p Priority CI Commands assign priority levels to individual ports IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight priorities 0 7 by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define priority of service 32 2 IEEE 802 1p Priority Commands Bridge port 1 stands for the Ethernet port bridge p
235. nt 26 7 IES 1000 User s Guide 192 168 1 1 adsl gt stat ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 or means all 8 ports lt vpi gt The VPI setting 0 to 255 lt vci gt The VCI setting 32 to 65535 if vpi 0 or 1 to 65535 if the vpi does not 0 The stat ch command shows the statistics of the specified PVC channel The following example displays the statistics for the PVC channel for port 8 that uses VPI 0 and VCI 33 192 168 1 1 adsl gt stat ch 8 0 33 PORT VPI VCI TX pkts RX pkts TXrate RXrate TX cells RX cells Figure 26 5 Channel Statistics Command Example 26 3 11 Channels Statistics Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt stat chs lt start port gt lt stop port gt where lt start port gt The first port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information is used if you leave this blank lt stop port gt The last port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information 8 is used if you leave this blank The stat chs command shows the statistics of the PVC channels for the specified ports The following example displays the statistics for the PVC channels for ports 5 to 8 26 8 Virtual Channel Management IES 1000 User s Guide 192 168 1 1 adsl gt stat chs 5 8 PORT VPI VCI TX pkts RX pkts TXrate RXrate TX cells RX cells Figure 26 6 Channel Statistics Command Example 26 3 12 Clear
236. nt secured host settings simply enter the command secured host 23 4 2 Secured Host Add Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt secured host add lt host IP gt where lt host IP gt The IP address of a secured host This command adds the IP address of a secured host You may add up to ten IP addresses 23 4 3 Secured Host Delete Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt secured host delete lt host IP gt where lt host IP gt The IP address of a secured host This command deletes the IP address of a previously added secured host 23 4 System Commands IES 1000 User s Guide 23 5 UNIX Syslog Commands Use UNIX syslog commands to send logs to your UNIX server If the DSL link is on or goes down the IES 1000 will send a log to your UNIX server The table shown next indicates what is logged in each case Table 23 1 Logs Sent to Your UNIX Server DSL LINK ON DSL LINK DOWN port number port number sequence number sequence number rate If the subscriber s device supports the dying gasp feature the AAM1008 can also send a log indicating that the subscriber turned off the ADSL modem or router If your UNIX server is down these logs will be lost 23 5 1 Syslog Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt syslog lt mode gt where lt mode gt enable or disable This command enables or disables the sending of logs to your UNIX server Syslog is disabled by default lt mode gt disable A
237. numbers and delete them from left to right lower numbers to higher numbers With an 8 wire group select 2 for ports five to eight or 1 for ports one to four Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link in the navigation panel on the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 128 5 Add G SHDSL Port Bonding Click Add in the Port Setup screen under the port bonding table to go to the Add G SHDSL Port Bonding screen 12 10 G SHDSL Module Port Setup IES 1000 User s Guide Add Port Bonding Bonding Name Mode 2 wire STU R Available Ports N w gt o o o 1 E E 5 s z 7 Apply Reset Figure 12 7 Add G SHDSL Port Bonding Table 12 7 Add G SHDSL Port Bonding LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Setup Click this link to go to the Port Setup screen Bonding Name Type a name to identify this port bonding group Mode Select the type of bonding units that you want to bond together into a port bonding group single logical connection and which side of the connection this port bonding group is Select 2 wire to bond individual ports each port uses two wires together Select 4 wire to bond 4 wire two port n wire groups together Sele
238. o bond 4 wire two port n wire groups together Type 8w to bond 8 wire four port n wire groups together You must use the set nwirec command to configure the 4 or 8 wire bundled groups before you can use this command to bond them lt group list gt When you select 4 wire or 8 wire mode list the member groups for this port bonding group You must have already used the set nwirec command to configure the 4 or 8 wire groups and the groups cannot be members of another port bonding group Configure the groups on both ends of a connection with the same number of 4 or 8 wire groups This command bonds the specified member list into a single port for the STU C SHDSL Termination Unit Central One SAM1008 must be set to be the central side and the other must be set to be the remote side Configure both with the same number of ports set to connect to the other SAM1008 and bonded You can bond multiple groups of ports as long as they do not overlap One SAM1008 module can have both STU C and STU R groups Make sure that G SHDSL ports one through four are all the same end of their connections all STU C or all STU R 25 12 G SHDSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Make sure that G SHDSL ports five through eight are all the same end of their connections all STU C or all STU R G SHDSL ports one through four do not need to be set to be the same end of the connection as G SHDSL ports five through eight For example G SHDS
239. oad displays the number of bits received per DMT tone for the upstream channel from the subscriber s DSL modem or router to the network module The bit allocation contents are only valid when the link is up In the following example the numbers of bits for two DMT tones display together 44 displays for DMT tones 96 and 97 This means DMT tone 96 transmitted 4 bits and tone 97 transmitted 4 bits Where neither of the two tones transmitted any bits a single 0 is displayed like tones O and 1 for example In the following example the downstream channel is carried on tones 38 to 240 and the upstream channel is carried on tones 9 to 31 space is left between the channels to avoid interference ADSL Commands 24 3 IES 1000 User s Guide An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 adsl gt linedata 7 DS carrier load number of bits per symbol tone 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22 22 3333 33 33 44 33 44 44 44 43 43 34 44 44 44 34 44 43 tone 0S Ls tone 32 63 tone 64 95 tone 96 127 tone 128 159 0 0 4 44 43 34 44 44 43 44 34 44 44 33 44 44 44 44 34 44 43 44 43 34 33 33 33 tone 160 191 43 33 33 34 34 23 33 33 22 33 33 33 tone 192 223 33 33 33 23 22 33 33 33 33 33 22 23 tone 224 255 22 22 22 22 20 22 22 0 0 0 0 0 US carrier load number of bits per symbol tone tone 0 31 0 0 0 0 2 34 55 77 88 89 99 99 99 98 tone 32 63 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 24 1 Linedata Command Example 24 3 7 L
240. ocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP 15 6 1 GARP Timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 15 6 2 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLANs groups beyond the local switch Please refer to the following table for common GARP terminology Table 15 1 GARP Terminology VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process VLAN Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members Administrative A A T Control Registration Ports with registration forbidden are not allowed to register join this Forbidden VLAN Normal Ports join a VLAN using GVRP Registration VLAN Tag Tagged Ports tag all VLAN member egress frames transmitted Control Untagged Ports do not tag all VLAN member egress frames transmitted VLAN 15 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 15 1 GARP Terminology VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received in Port Set
241. odule s firmware and all configuration files 36 1 FTP Firmware Upload on the Network Module ZyXEL periodically releases new firmware for the network modules for bug fixes and enhancements Please check the web site at www zyxel com periodically for the latest firmware release The network modules use FTP for firmware uploads through their built in FTP server when the network module is operational To update the firmware first download it the file will have an img extension name from the ZyXEL web site and store it on your computer You can use any FTP client for example ftp exe in Windows to upgrade the network module s firmware The procedure for FTP upgrade is as follows Firmware Upload and Recovery 36 1 IES 1000 User s Guide Do not turn off the network module during the updating process as it may corrupt the firmware and make your network module unusable Connect to the network module with your favorite FTP client The command for the network module is generally ftp lt network module IP address gt at the computer command prompt Enter the user name just press ENTER For example User lt ENTER gt Enter the management password 1234 by default For example Password 1234 230 Logged in Transfer the firmware file to the network module For example ftp gt put 201AS0b1 img image where 201AS0b1 img The firmware file that you want to upload image The internal firmware name i
242. of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your IES Address 1000 that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your IES 1000 Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of O for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 0 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number 14 2 Static Route IES 1000 User s Guide Table 14 2 Add Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this page afresh Static Route 14 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 15 VLAN This chapter explains how to configure VLANs on the IES 1000 15 1 VLAN Overview A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned
243. of the configuration file and click Upload File Path Browse Figure 18 5 Restore Configuration Maintenance 18 5 IES 1000 User s Guide 18 2 4 Backup Configuration Screen Click Maintenance in the navigation panel and then Backup Configuration to open the Backup Configuration screen Use the Backup Configuration screen to save the current configuration of the IES 1000 to a computer Click Maintenance to return to the main maintenance screen Step 1 Click Backup Configuration to display the Backup Configuration screen Step 2 Click Backup to display the Save As screen Step 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a name for it in the File name field Step 4 Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer Backup Configuration This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Figure 18 6 Backup Configuration 18 6 Maintenance IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 19 Statistics This chapter explains the Advanced Management Statistics screens 19 1 Statistics Overview The web configurator provides statistics screens to allow you to see how much traffic the IES 1000 is handling and how it is handling it 19 2 Statistics Screen Click Statistics in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to view general informatio
244. ofile lt name gt where lt name gt A profile name The show profile command displays the settings of a G SHDSL profile An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 gshds1 gt show profile gold Profile contents Profile name Cmax Cmin PSD region gold 2048 192 annexB This display shows that the gold profile s maximum transmission rate is set to 2048 Kbps and the minimum transmission rate is set to 192 Kbps 25 3 14 Show Profiles Command Syntax G SHDSL Commands 25 7 IES 1000 User s Guide 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt show profiles The show profiles command displays the settings of all the G SHDSL profiles 25 3 15 Set Port Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set port lt port gt lt profile name gt where lt port gt The number of the port to which you want to assign a profile lt profile name gt The profile that defines the minimum and maximum transfer rates for this port The set port command assigns a specific profile to an individual port The profile defines the maximum and minimum transmission rates and the Power Spectral Density region 25 3 16 Set Ports Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set ports lt profile name gt where lt profile name gt The profile that defines the minimum and maximum transfer rates for this port This CI command is like the Set Port Command described in section 25 3 15 except that this command configures all G SHDSL ports to have a specified profile Enter
245. ol gt A VLAN ID Valid parameter range 1 4094 A bridge port number Valid parameter range 1 9 Registrar administration control flag Valid parameters fixed forbidden normal Select fixed to register a lt port gt to the static VLAN table with lt vid gt Select normal to confirm registration of the lt port gt to the static VLAN table with lt vid gt Select forbidden to block a lt port gt from joining the static VLAN table with lt vid gt The tag control flag Valid parameters tag untag Select tag to add tags to outgoing frames Select untag if you do not want to tag outgoing frames This command adds or modifies an entry into the static VLAN table Display your configuration by using the Svlan List command An example of a configuration is shown next IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 31 5 IES 1000 User s Guide Modify a Static VLAN Table Example The following is an example of how to modify a static VLAN table e 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt svlan setentry 3 3 fixed untag 2 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan setentry 2 2 fixed untag 3 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt svlan setentry 1 1 fixed tag 4 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan list The arrows in the figure shown next point to the lines that have been modified in this table as a result of the previous commands ad_control tag_control untag untag untag untag untag untag untag untag Figure 31 3 Example SVLAN
246. on the Ethernet switch as shown next CI mn a i Mf q Alida a R A A E t TORA E z f Ethemet Switch Figure 6 12 Stacking Multiple IES 1000 Units 6 5 AC Power Model Power Connection Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket on the front panel of your IES 1000 to the right of the fuse housing as shown next Connect the other end of the cord to a power outlet Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans located on the side of the unit Make sure you use a 100 240VAC 1A 50 60Hz power source 6 12 Hardware Connections IES 1000 User s Guide W Y f a UA A A G toca O Y A 8 a ee 3 AE Figure 6 13 Connecting the Power Cord to the IES 1000 and a Power Source 6 6 DC Power Model Power Connections Use the following procedures to connect the IES 1000 to a power source after you have installed the IES 1000 in a rack Refer to power supply requirements in the hardware specifications in the appendices and make sure you are using an appropriate power source Observe the following before you start gt Refer to the Hardware Specifications appendix for the gauge of wire to use for the IES 1000 power connections gt Keep the IES 1000 power switch in the off position until you come to procedure for turning on the power gt Keep the power supply switch in the off position until you come to procedure for turning on the power U
247. ork modules in the chassis Note that this must be the last step before you lose the connection to the network module e Telnet to the operational IP address of a network module e Usethe svlan delentry command to remove the default VLAN ID 1 e Usethevlan enable command to activate the VLAN after you have finished all of your configuration Example 1 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan delentry 1 31 2 IEEE 802 1QG Tagged VLAN Commands IES 1000 User s Guide 2 192 168 1 1 vlanlgq gt vlan enable 31 3 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands Bridge port 1 stands for the Ethernet port bridge port 2 stands for DSL port 1 bridge port 3 stands for DSL port 2 and so on 31 3 1 VLAN Enable Command The default for the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN is disabled Enable the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN by following the example shown next Syntax 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt vlan enable 31 3 2 VLAN Disable Command You can disable the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN by using the VLAN Disable command Syntax 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt vlan disable This command disables the IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN 31 3 3 PVID Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt pvid lt port gt lt vlan id gt where lt port gt A bridge port number Valid parameter range 1 9 lt vlan id gt The VLAN ID Valid parameter range 1 4094 IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 31 3 IES 1000 User s Guide This command sets the VLAN ID to a specific port i
248. orking Fans 8 1 VT100 3 1 22 1 W ZyXEL Web Site xxii WAN Link 8 3 R Index
249. ort 2 stands for DSL port 1 bridge port 3 stands for DSL port 2 and so on 32 2 1 Priority Port Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt priority port lt port gt lt priority gt where lt port gt A bridge port number Valid parameter range 1 9 or where means all ports lt priority gt The default priority for the specified port Valid parameter range 0 7 where 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest priority This command sets the default priority that is assigned to untagged frames from a specified ingress port To display the default port priority table simply use the Priority Port command without parameters as shown next 192 168 1 1 vlanlgq gt priority port IEEE 802 1p Priority Commands 32 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 32 2 2 Regen Port Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt regen port lt port gt lt user priority gt lt regenerated priority gt where lt port gt A bridge port number Valid parameter range 1 9 lt user priority gt The user priority for a frame received on this port Valid parameter range 0 7 or where 0 is the lowest priority 7 is the highest priority and means all user priorities lt regenerated priority gt The regenerated user priority the incoming user priority is mapped to for lt port gt Valid parameter range 0 7 where 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest priority This command changes the priorit
250. p name gt or 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt super lt vcp name gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 or means all 8 ports lt vpi gt The VPI setting 0 to 255 lt vci gt The VCI setting 32 to 65535 if vpi 0 or 1 to 65535 if the vpi does not 0 lt pvid gt z The default VID 0 to 4094 Each PVC must have a unique VID since the network module forwards traffic back to the subscribers based on the VLAN ID lt priority gt The IEEE 802 1p default priority 0 to 7 lt vcp name gt A virtual channel profile s name super Sets this channel as the super channel for this port The set ch command creates a new PVC channel or modifies an existing one The following example creates a PVC channel for port 8 that uses VPI 0 VCI 33 PVID 6 IEEE 802 1p default priority of 3 and the gold virtual channel profile 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set ch 8 0 33 6 3 gold 26 3 2 Delete Channel Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt delete ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 or means all 8 ports lt vpi gt The VPI setting 0 to 255 lt vci gt The VCI setting 32 to 65535 if vpi 0 or 1 to 65535 if the vpi does not 0 26 4 Virtual Channel Management IES 1000 User s Guide The delete ch command deletes the specified PVC channel The following example deletes the PVC channel for port 8 that uses VPI 0 and VCI 33
251. panel of the IES 1000 in front of you Step 2 Remove the power cord for easy access to the fuse housing Step 3 Using a small flat head screwdriver gently pry open the right side of the fuse housing located to the left of the power cord port receptacle as shown next E ZyXEL ea A auk F AL i o E is E a d f f f pr OVAC FUSE RATED F3A25 Diagram 1 Opening the Fuse Housing Removing and Installing a Fuse C IES 1000 User s Guide Step 4 Gently pull the fuse casing from the IES 1000 The installed fuse is located attached to and on the outside of the fuse housing the spare fuse is located inside the fuse housing ec N y A Y La O C l E i uE RATED I La 4 om Gr Diagram 2 Accessing the Spare Fuse Step 5 Remove the burnt out fuse from the IES 1000 A burnt out fuse is blackened darkened or cloudy inside its glass casing A working fuse has a completely clear glass casing Dispose of the burnt out fuse Installing Fuses Step 1 After removing the burnt out fuse gently push the replacement fuse into the same location as the old fuse until you hear a click Step 2 Firmly but gently push the fuse housing back into the IES 1000 housing until you hear a click Step 3 Plug the power cord back into the IES 1000 D Removing and Installing a Fuse IES 1000 User s Guide Appendix C Pin Assignments Mini RJ 11 4P4C Console Port Pin Assignments
252. panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 5 Port Filter Port based VLAN The IES 1000 port filter or port based VLAN mechanism can be used to limit the broadcast domain to the members of a port filter group only In this way the port filter increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast frames go to each and every individual port The stations on a logical network belong to one group however a station can belong to more than one group Subscribers of one group are not allowed to access the resources of other groups and a higher level of security is achieved This isolates the subscribers from one another and prevents a subscriber from discovering the resources for example shared drives or printers of another subscriber In the IES 1000 port filter the allowable outgoing port s of each incoming port must be defined Ethernet frames are forwarded according to these rules Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress port outgoing port for both ports An egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data frame leaves Port filters are specific only to the switch on whic
253. play This command displays the system error log ADSL link down port number sequence number noise margin attenuation ADSL OVER HEAT RELEASE temperature G SHDSL link down port number sequence number noise margin attenuation G SHDSL OVER_HEAT_ RELEASE temperature Console session end Telnet session end Insecure telnet access IP address FTP session end Insecure FTP access IP address FTP receive file OK file name Upgrade firmware or restore the configuration file through FTP or the web configurator to store an error log in non volatile memory 23 6 2 Errlog Clear Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt errlog clear This command clears the system error log If you clear a log using the errlog clear command you may not view it again 23 6 System Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 24 ADSL Commands The ADSL Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line subsystem allows you to configure and monitor the ADSL ports on the AAM1008 network module 24 1 ADSL Overview See the web configurator chapter on ADSL for background information about ADSL 24 2 Configured Versus Actual Rate You configure the maximum rate of an individual ADSL port by modifying its profile see the set profile command or assigning the port to a different profile see the set port command However due to noise and other factors on the line the actual rate may not reach the maximum that you specify Even though you
254. ple 255 255 255 0 lt default gateway gt The default gateway IP address of the network module Line 1 brings you to the IP subsystem Line 2 allows you to add a new IP address for the IES 1000 The IP address of the IES 1000 is displayed in the command prompt If you don t enter the subnet mask the system automatically computes the subnet mask when the system is restarted Line 3 deletes the existing default route Line 4 adds the new default route The default route tells the system where the gateway next hop is when the IES 1000 sends packets to a destination that is not on the same subnet as the IES 1000 Line 5 saves the new configuration to the nonvolatile memory For example if you want the IES 1000 to have 192 168 1 3 as the IP address 255 255 255 0 for the subnet mask and 192 168 1 233 for the default gateway you may use the following command sequence IP Commands 33 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 192 168 1 1 gt ip 192 168 1 1 ip gt enable ether 192 168 1 3 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 ip gt route delete default 192 168 1 1 ip gt route add default 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 233 00 00 00 00 192 168 1 1 ip gt config save TIES 1000 Gateway IP address 192 168 1 3 IP address 192 168 1 233 subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Figure 33 1 Setting IP Address and Default Gateway The IES 1000 leaves the factory with a default IP address of 192 168 1 1 and a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 ff ff ff 0 in hexadecimal
255. plication The IES 1000 provides DSL service over telephone wires to subscribers The following figure shows the IES 1000 set up in an Internet Service Provider ISP building or telephone company central office A s Ethernet ISP or Telecom Eb street cabinet Central Office or telephone A Ethemet SHDSL pole box 3922 SHDSL SHDSL 1 MDF Ma a Figure 1 2 Central Office or ISP Application 1 6 Getting to Know the IES 1000 IES 1000 User s Guide 2 1 Chapter 2 Factory Default Settings This section describes the factory default settings of the IES 1000 IP Parameters IP address 192 168 1 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 192 168 1 254 Console Port Baud rate 9600 bps Data bits 8 Parity none Stop bit 1 Flow control none SNMP Community Strings Read public Write 1234 Console Telnet Web Configurator and FTP Password User name admin web configurator Password 1234 default G SHDSL Ports SAM1008 Encapsulation RFC 1483 Multiplexing LLC based VPI 0 VCI 33 Factory Default Settings 2 1 IES 1000 User s Guide 2 The factory default settings for the Ethernet port of the IES 1000 are Enable Disable State Disabled Profile DEFVAL gt Maximum upstream downstream speed 2304 Kbps gt Minimum upstream downstream speed 192 Kbps ADSL Ports AAM1008 Encapsulation RFC 1483 Multiplexing LLC based
256. port number gt A port number from 1 to 8 The list port command shows the configured maximum upstream downstream rates the mode or standard and enable disable state of an individual ADSL port 24 8 ADSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide 24 3 Syntax 12 List Ports Command 192 168 1 1 adsl gt list ports The list ports command shows the configured maximum rates modes and states of all ADSL ports 24 3 Syntax where 13 Set Profile Command 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set profile lt name gt fast lt atur max rate gt lt atuc max rate gt ldly lt atur delay gt lt atuc delay gt lt atur gt lt atuc gt lt atux gt lt target margin gt lt min margin gt lt max margin gt lt min rate gt lt name gt The name of the profile up to 31 characters fast This is optional to set this profile for fast latency mode Select fast mode to use no interleaving and have faster transmission a fast channel This would be suitable if you have a good line where little error correction is necessary lt atur max rate gt The maximum ADSL upstream transmission rate lt atuc max rate gt The maximum ADSL downstream transmission rate lt atur delay gt The upstream interleave latency delay 0 255 milliseconds lt atuc delay gt The downstream interleave latency delay 0 255 milliseconds lt atur target margin gt The upstream target ADSL signal noise margin 0 31db
257. r so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh Getting Started Screens 10 23 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 11 ADSL Module Port Setup This chapter explains how to configure individual ports on the AAM 1008 11 1 ADSL Module Port Setup Overview The web configurator allows you to configure settings for the ADSL Access Module s ports 11 2 ADSL Standards Overview The ADSL module supports both the G lite and the G dmt standards G lite is intended to minimize the cost for the consumer market Table 11 1 Maximum Transfer Rates of the ADSL Ports STANDARD MAXIMUM DOWNSTREAM MAXIMUM UPSTREAM G dmt AAM1008 61 8160 Kbps 1024 Kbps G dmt Annex B AAM1008 63 8160 Kbps 1024 Kbps ETSI AAM1008 63 8160 Kbps 1024 Kbps G lite AAM1008 61 1536 Kbps 512 Kbps ANSI T1 413 issue 2 AAM1008 61 8160 Kbps 1024 Kbps 11 3 Downstream and Upstream Downstream refers to traffic going out from the DSL module to the subscriber s DSL modem or router Upstream refers to traffic coming into the DSL module from the subscriber s DSL modem or router 11 4 Profiles A profile is a table that contains a list of pre configured DSL settings Each DSL port has one and only one profile assigned to it at any given time You can configure multiple prof
258. r 1 Name FT Active Default 802 1p Priority fo Profile DEFVAL 802 10 VLAN Default VLAN ID GVRP VLAN Acceptable Frame Type r KA Apply Reset Figure 12 5 G SHDSL Port Setup The following table describes this screen Table 12 5 G SHDSL Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Channel Setup Click this link to go to the port s Channel Setup screen Port Setup Click this link to go to the Port Setup screen Name Type a name to identify this port Active Select this check box to turn on this G SHDSL port The G SHDSL ports are disabled by default because an enabled but disconnected G SHDSL port generates more heat than an operating port Disable G SHDSL ports when they are not in use to minimize heat generation and enhance reliability Default 802 1p Type the priority value 0 to 7 to add to incoming frames without a IEEE 802 1p priority tag Priority Profile Use the drop down list box to select a profile to assign to this port 12 8 G SHDSL Module Port Setup IES 1000 User s Guide Table 12 5 G SHDSL Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Default VLAN Type the Port VLAN ID PVID from 1 to 4094 The IES 1000 assigns the PVID to untagged ID frames or priority frames 0 VID received on this port GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports acro
259. r loses power so use the Config Save link in the navigation panel on the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh gt At the time of writing GVRP is not available with the DSL ports 6 At the time of writing the VLAN Acceptable Frame Type field is read only The IES 1000 accepts both tagged and untagged incoming frames ADSL Module Port Setup 11 11 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 12 G SHDSL Module Port Setup This chapter explains how to configure individual ports on the SAM1008 12 1 GSHDSL Module Port Setup Overview The web configurator allows you to configure settings for the G SHDSL Access Module s ports 12 2 GSHDSL Standards Overview The G SHDSL module supports both the Annex A and the Annex B power spectral density regions with G 991 2 Table 12 1 Data Rates of the SAM1008 s SHDSL Ports STANDARD MAXIMUM UPSTREAM AND MINIMUM UPSTREAM AND DOWNSTREAM RATE DOWNSTREAM RATE G 991 2 2304 Kbps 192 Kbps 123 GSHDSL Profiles A profile is a table that contains a list of pre configured G SHDSL settings Each G SHDSL port has one and only one profile assigned to it at any given time You can configure multiple profiles including profiles for troubleshooting Profiles allow you to configure G SHDSL ports efficiently You can configure all ofthe G SHDSL ports with the same p
260. range of ports for which you want to display line information 8 is used if you leave this blank The enable chs command turns on the PVC channels for the specified ports The following example turns on the PVC channels for ports 5 to 8 192 168 1 1 adsl gt enable chs 5 8 26 3 8 Disable Channel Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt disable ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 or means all 8 ports lt vpi gt The VPI setting 0 to 255 lt vci gt The VCI setting 32 to 65535 if vpi 0 or 1 to 65535 if the vpi does not 0 The disable ch command turns off the specified PVC channel The following example turns off the PVC channel for port 8 that uses VPI 0 and VCI 33 192 168 1 1 adsl gt disable ch 8 0 33 26 3 9 Disable Channels Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt disable chs lt start port gt lt stop port gt where lt start port gt The first port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information 1 is used if you leave this blank lt stop port gt The last port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information 8 is used if you leave this blank The disable chs command turns off the PVC channels for the specified ports The following example turns off the PVC channels for ports 5 to 8 192 168 1 1 adsl gt disable chs 5 8 26 3 10 Channel Statistics Command Syntax Virtual Channel Manageme
261. reen to check its current firmware version number Step 2 Download and unzip the new firmware Step 3 Goto the Firmware Upgrade screen Step 4 Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the IES 1000 in the File Path field or click Browse to display the Choose File screen from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Upload 18 4 Maintenance IES 1000 User s Guide Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse to the location of the binary img file and click Upload File Path Browse Upload Figure 18 4 Firmware Upgrade 18 2 3 Restore Configuration Screen Click Maintenance in the navigation panel and then Restore Configuration to open the Restore Configuration screen Use the Restore Configuration screen to restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the IES 1000 Click Maintenance to return to the main maintenance screen Do not interrupt the restore process as it may permanently damage the IES 1000 The IES 1000 automatically restarts when the restore process is complete Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path field or click Browse to display the Choose File screen from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Upload Restore Configuration To restore the device s configuration from a file browse to the location
262. ridge devices ethertype Displays the types of packets that the ports are set to forward lt port gt lt any ip pppoe gt Sets the type of packets that a port is allowed forward filter Displays the filtering database filterage Displays the filter age time lt seconds gt Sets the filter age time flush Clears the filtering database for all ports lt portNo gt Clears the filtering database on an individual port info Shows bridge information interface files Shows files opened by upper layer info Shows ether support driver information stats Shows bridge upper interface statistics version Shows ether support driver information portfilter Displays ports to forward to lt srcPort gt lt all destPorts gt Sets ports to forward to status Displays bridge management statistics igmpsnoop Displays the multicast filtering database flush Clears all stored IGMP snooping records Commands Introduction 22 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION enable 1 2 Turns on IGMP snooping 1 sets unknown discard mode 2 sets unknown flood mode disable Turns off IGMP snooping timeout lt seconds gt Sets how long the IES 1000 retains entries in the multicast filtering database mfilter Displays t
263. rofile by modifying the profile thus removing the need to configure the G SHDSL ports one by one You can also change an individual G SHDSL port by assigning it a different profile For example you could set up different profiles for different kinds of accounts for example economy standard and premium Assign the appropriate profile to a G SHDSL port and it takes care of a large part of the port s configuration See later in this chapter for how to configure profiles You can only delete a profile when no G SHDSL port refers to it 12 4 N wire Mode The n wire mode allows you to physically bundle two G SHDSL ports into a single 4 wire connection The 4 wire mode is described in ITU T G 991 2 You can use it to connect to G SHDSL modems or routers that also support 4 wire mode N wire mode also allows you to physically bundle four G SHDSL ports into a single 8 wire connection The 8 wire group is proprietary and should be used between two SAM 1008s N wire mode can increase the reach of a particular data rate without having to regenerate the signal It can also give increased bandwidth for LAN to LAN applications GSHDSL Module Port Setup 12 1 IES 1000 User s Guide You can n wire bundle multiple groups of ports on a single IES 1000 or even within a single SAM1008 module as long as they do not overlap 12 5 Port Bonding The port bonding feature allows you to send IP packets over two to eight G SHDSL connections as a single con
264. roportion to the video image s changing dynamics The nrt VBR non real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation An example of an nrt VBR connection would be non time sensitive data file transfers Available Bit Rate ABR The Available Bit Rate ABR ATM traffic class is used for bursty data transfers ABR gives a subscriber a set amount of bandwidth and allows the use of more if it is available End devices using ABR get feedback from the network and can use flow control to dynamically adjust transmission rates ABR uses RM Resource Management cells to send feedback information from the connections destination and or intervening network switches to the connection s source A source generates forward RM cells which the destination returns to the source as backward RM cells Along the way network switches can adjust the fields in the RM cells depending on network conditions Number of Resource Management NRM is the maximum number of cells a source may send for each forward Resource Management cell Minimum Cell Rate MCR applies with the abr traffic class Unspecified Bit Rate UBR The Unspecified Bit Rate UBR ATM traffic class is similar to the ABR traffic class for bursty data transfers However while ABR gives subscribers a set amount of bandwidth UBR doesn t guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare band
265. roup named rl for the N wire A and N wire B n wire groups 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt set bondr 8w rl 1 2 25 3 28 Delete N wire Group Command Syntax 25 14 G SHDSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide 192 168 1 1 gshds1 gt delete nwire lt group name gt where lt group name gt The name of the n wire group This command removes the specified n wire group An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt delete N wire A This removes the n wire group so the ports function as individual ports as opposed to being part of one physically bundled link 25 3 29 Delete Port Bonding Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt delete bond lt bond name gt where lt bond name gt The name of the bonding group This command removes the specified bonding group An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt delete bond cl This removes the bond for ports 2 3 4 and 8 so they function as individual ports as opposed to being part of one logical link 25 3 30 List N wire Groups Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt list nwire The list nwire command displays all of the n wire groups The following is an example 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt list nwire N wire configuration Group name Bundled ports Figure 25 3 List N wire Groups Command Example G SHDSL Commands 25 15 IES 1000 User s Guide 25 3 31 List Bonded Members Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt list bond The list bond comman
266. rrors are found Severely Errored Second The total number of one second intervals when at least fifty CRC errors are found Loss of Sync Word Failure Second Displays the total number of one second intervals when one or more SHDSL LOSW errors are found Unavailable Second The total number of one second intervals when the G SHDSL line is unavailable The number of times the G SHDSL line has been dropped List Port Command 192 168 1 1 gshdsl gt list port lt port gt lt port gt The port number from 1 to 8 This command displays information about the line speed state and the line rate parameter of a G SHDSL port An example is shown next where 192 168 1 1 gshdsl1 gt List port 8 Port al 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Cmax Cmin Act Speed Kbps Mode Bonding PSD region State Cmax Cmin Act 2304 2304 2304 2304 2304 2304 2304 2304 Normal annexB Disabled Down 2 wireC annexB Disabled Down 2 wireC annexB Disabled Down 2 wireC annexB Disabled Down Normal annexB Disabled Down Normal annexB Disabled Down Normal annexB Disabled Down 2 wireC annexB Disabled Down Figure 25 1 List Port Command Example Configured maximum line speed in Kbps The maximum G SHDSL line speed you configured For details about configuring this parameter see section 25 3 15 This is the configured minimum line speed in Kbps for th
267. rt Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field shows whether the port is turned on Yes or not No The factory default of all DSL ports is disabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name This field shows the name that identifies this port Profile This field shows which profile is assigned to this port Max Rate This field shows the maximum speed that is configured for this port Kbps Max Rate This field shows the minimum speed that is configured for this port Kbps PSD Region This field shows the Power Spectral Density PSD region that is configured for this port Annex A or Annex B Channels This field displays the number of PVCs Permanent Virtual Circuits that are configured for this port N wire Group Name This field displays the name of an n wire group they are listed in alphabetical order Mode This field displays how many wires are bundled in the n wire group as well as which side of the connection this n wire group is For example 4 wire STU C means two ports physically bundled on the SHDSL Terminal Unit Central side 8 wire STU R means four ports physically bundled on the SHDSL Terminal Unit Remote side Group This field displays the number of the n wire group Number Bundled Ports This field displays the ports that belong to an n wire group Add Click this button to configure a new n wire group Delete Select an
268. rt zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8411 www zyxel fi ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 sales zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8448 00700 Helsinki Finland France info zyxel fr 33 4 72 52 97 97 www zyxel fr ZyXEL France 1 rue des Vergers 33 4 72 52 19 20 Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France Germany support zyxel de 49 2405 6909 0 www zyxel de ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 sales zyxel de 49 2405 6909 99 Wuerselen Germany Hungary support zyxel hu 36 1 3361649 www zyxel hu ZyXEL Hungary 48 Zoldlomb Str info zyxel hu 36 1 3259100 H 1025 Budapest Hungary Kazakhstan http zyxel kz support 7 3272 590 698 www zyxel kz ZyXEL Kazakhstan43 Dostyk ave Office 414 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan North America support zyxel com 1 800 255 4101 1 714 632 0882 www us zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Inc 1130 N Miller St sales zyxel ru 7 095 542 89 25 Anaheim sales zyxel com 1 714 632 0858 ftp us zyxel com CA 92806 2001 U S A Norway support zyxel no 47 22 80 61 80 www zyxel no ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 sales zyxel no 47 22 80 61 81 0667 Oslo Norway Poland info pl zyxel com 48 22 5286603 www pl zyxel com ZyXEL Communications ul Emilli Plater 53 48 22 5206701 00 113 Warszawa Poland Russia http zyxel ru support 7 095 542 89 29 www zyxel ru ZyXEL Russia Ostrovityanova 37a Str Moscow 117279 Russia Customer Support
269. rt4 Packet w o tag to DSL port5 Packet w o tag to DSL port if registered Packet with tag vid 1to DSL port Packet w o tag to DSL port Packet to CPU Figure 31 4 SVLAN Example An untagged frame comes in from the LAN The switch checks the PVID table and assigns a temporary VID of 1 The switch ignores port 1 the LAN port where the frame came in because the switch does not send a frame to the port that it came in through The switch sees that port s 2 3 4 6 7 and 9 DSL ports 1 2 3 5 6 and 8 are all set to fixed and untag which means the SVLAN allows the frame to be sent to those ports without a tag Port 5 is forbidden so the frame is not forwarded to DSL port 4 Port 7 DSL port 6 is normal which means that it was entered dynamically so the frame is permitted to be forwarded to port 7 if port 7 is registered in the DVLAN table After looking at the SVLAN the switch sees that the port filter is set for port 1 the LAN port to forward frames to all of the ADSL ports so the switch forwards everything that the SVLAN permits Please note that the switch also sends the frame to CPU the switch itself because the switch is a member of this VLAN The switch can be a member of only one VLAN at a time IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 31 7 IES 1000 User s Guide 31 3 7 SVLAN Getentry Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 vlanlq gt svlan getentry lt vid gt where lt vid gt A
270. rts see 6 4 for details Figure 6 1 SAM1008 Front Panel Connections Overview 6 2 Console Port For the initial configuration you need to use terminal emulator software on a computer and connect it to a network module through the console port Connect the mini RJ 11 end of the console cable to the console port of the network module Connect the other end to a serial port of your computer After the initial setup you can modify the configuration remotely through Telnet connections Hardware Connections 6 1 IES 1000 User s Guide LAN AA F i 7 R wa mu MA LS you LL bar suso ll JU Figure 6 2 Console Port Connection 6 3 SHDSL Port Connections The SHDSL ports connect to an MDF Main Distribution Frame and end user equipment via telephone wires e For detailed specifications about the associated RJ 11 connector refer to the Pin Assignment appendix e For more detail about MDF connections refer to the Notes About MDFs Main Distribution Frames section shown later The procedure shown next explains how to complete a single G SHDSL connection SAM1008 to an MDF via an SHDSL port Instructions on ADSL connections AAM1008 come later 6 3 1 Procedure to Complete a G SSHDSL Connection Step 1 Connect the RJ 11 end of a telephone wire to the SHDSL port on the front panel of the SAM1008 as shown next Step 2 Connect the other end of the telephone wire to the upper port of an MDF Main Distribution Frame using a
271. s chs lt start port gt lt stop Enables all PVC channels for specific port gt ports port lt portNo gt Enables the specified GSHDSL port ports Enables all GSHDSL ports disable ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Disables the specified PVC channel s chs lt start port gt lt stop Disables all PVC channels for the port gt specified ports port lt portNo gt Disables the specified GSHDSL port ports Disables all GSHDSL ports lineinfo lt portNo gt Shows the statistics of the specified GSHDSL ports lineperf lt portNo gt Shows the line quality of the specified GSHDSL port set ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt pvid gt Creates a new PVC channel or lt priority gt lt vcp name gt modifies an existing one ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt super lt vcp name gt Creates a super channel or modifies an existing one profile lt profile name gt lt Cmax gt lt Cmin gt annexA annexB Sets the specified profile a maximum and a minimum rate and a PSD region port lt portNo gt lt profile gt Applies a specified profile setting to a GSHDSL port ports lt profile gt Applies the specified profile setting to all GSHDSL ports 22 12 Commands Introduction IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION bondc lt bond name gt lt port list gt or bonde lt mode gt lt bond name gt l
272. s 15 2 Downstream 11 7 Firmware Downstream ds 24 7 Recovery 36 1 36 2 Downstream Max Rate Kbps 11 5 Remote Upload 36 1 Duplex 8 3 Firmware Upload DVLAN Getentry Command 31 9 File Types 36 1 DVLAN List Command 31 8 FTP 36 1 DVLAN Table 15 2 Impact to the IES 1000 36 1 E Protocols 36 1 Enable Channel Command 26 6 Timing 36 1 Enable Channels Command 26 6 Flow control 8 3 Enable Command 33 4 Flush Command 28 4 Enable Port Command 24 2 25 2 FPVID Command 28 7 Enable Ports Command 24 3 25 3 Free standing 4 1 Enable the DSL port 8 2 Front Panel 3 1 Encapsulation 13 10 LEDs 7 1 Errlog Clear Command 23 6 Front Panel Connections 6 1 Errlog Display Command 23 6 Console Port 6 1 Ethernet Port Commands 27 1 Ethernet 6 12 Ethernet Port Default Settings 2 2 Overview 6 1 Ethertype Command 28 5 Front Panel Ports 3 2 Exit Command 23 2 FTP 36 1 Exposed Power Wire A FTP Firmware Upload 36 1 F Fuse C D 8 1 Factory Default Settings 2 1 Type C Fans 7 1 8 1 Fuse Rated H Location 7 1 G Fast Mode 1 2 G 991 2 12 1 FCC iii G dmt 11 1 12 1 24 12 24 13 FCC Warning iii G lite 11 1 24 12 24 13 Filter Command 28 3 G SHDSL Commands 25 1 Index K IES 1000 User s Guide G SHDSL Compliance 1 1 G SHDSL modem 8 2 8 3 G SHDSL Module Port Setup 12 3 G SHDSL Port 8 2 G SHDSL Ports SAM1008 2 1 G SHDSL Profile Add or Edit 12 6 G SHDSL Profile Setup 12 5 G SHDSL Standards 27 2 GARP 15 3 General IP Commands 33 2 35 1 General Setup 10 1 General Syntax Conv
273. s This link takes you to a screen where you can change your password Maintenance This link takes you to a screen where you can perform firmware maintenance Statistics This link takes you to a screen where you can view statistical information about the status of your device 9 2 Web Configurator Access and Navigation IES 1000 User s Guide Table 9 1 Navigation Panel Links LABEL DESCRIPTION Diagnostic This link takes you to a screen where you can view error logs and test the DSL connections Config Save Click this link to save your changes to the device s non volatile memory Logout Use this to exit the web configurator 9 4 Screens Overview The following table lists the various web configurator screens Table 9 2 Web Configurator Screens GETTING STARTED ADVANCED APPLICATIONS ADVANCED MANAGEMENT General Setup Bridge Setup Bridge Packet Type Filter Setup Bridge Port Filter Setup Bridge MAC Filter Setup Bridge MAC Count Filter Setup MAC Count Filter Edit Bridge MAC Address Record IGMP Snooping Record DHCP Relay Setup Add DHCP Server 802 1X Setup Edit 802 1X Setup Bridge Fast Mode VLAN ID Setup IP Setup Port Setup DSL Profile Setup Add Edit DSL Profile Add G SHDSL N wire Group Add G SHDSL Port Bonding Edit Port Setup Channel Setup VC Profile Setup Add Edit VC Profile Add Edit Channel Setup Static Route Setup Add Static Route VLAN Static Entry Setup Edit VLAN
274. s ds n uas us 2107 0 fe_loss_seconds ne_loss_seconds 0 0 fe_fec_seconds ne_fec_seconds 0 0 fast_trains 0 fast_trains fail 2 0 Figure 24 3 Lineperf Command Example These counters display line performance data that has been accumulated since the system started In the list above the definitions of near end far end will always be relative to the ATU C ADSL Termination Unit Central Office 24 6 ADSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Downstream ds refers to data from the ATU C and upstream us refers to data from the ATU R T stands for interleaved and ni stands for non interleaved fast mode A block is a set of consecutive bits associated with the path each bit belongs to one and only one block Consecutive bits may not be contiguous in time Table 24 2 Line Performance Counters LABEL DESCRIPTION nfebe The number of far end block errors nere Near end cyclic redundancy check errors nfecc The number of far end forward error correction count nfec The number of near end forward error count nblks The number of blocks transmitted nsec The number of seconds the connection has been up n eb The number of super frames containing at least one error at the far ds or near us end n bbe The number of background block errors not occurring during a severely errored second at the far ds or near us end n es The number of errored seconds This is how many
275. s from 32 to 1024 Kbps are supported Configure the maximum upstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum downstream transfer rate 11 6 ADSL Module Port Setup IES 1000 User s Guide Table 11 4 ADSL Add Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Min Rate Kbps Type the minimum upstream transfer rate from 32 to 1024 Kbps for this profile Configure the minimum upstream transfer rate to be less than the maximum upstream transfer rate Latency Delay ms Configure this field when you set the Latency Mode field to interleave Type the number of milliseconds 0 255 of interleave delay to use for upstream transfers It is recommended that you configure the same latency delay for both upstream and downstream Max SNR db Type the maximum upstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Min SNR db Type the minimum upstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the minimum upstream signal to noise margin to be less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin Target SNR db Type the target upstream signal to noise margin 0 31 dB Configure the target upstream signal to noise margin to be greater than or equal to the minimum upstream signal to noise margin and less than or equal to the maximum upstream signal to noise margin Down Stream The following parameters relate to downstream transmissions Max Rate Kbps Type a maximum downstream transfer rate in Kbps for th
276. s if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link in the navigation panel on the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh Virtual Channel Management 13 11 Advanced Applications and Management Part IV Advanced Applications and Management This part describes the Advanced Applications and Advanced Management web configurator screens and troubleshooting IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 14 Static Route This chapter explains how to configure static routes for the IES 1000 14 1 Static Route Overview The web configurator allows you to set up static routes that tell the IES 1000 how to forward management traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually 14 2 Static Route Setup Screen Click Static Route Setup in the navigation panel to open this screen Static Route Setup is a static route summary table Static Route Setup Name Destination Subnet Mask Gateway Address Address Metric Delete 0 Add Delete Figure 14 1 Static Route Setup The following table describes this screen Table 14 1 Static Route Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purposes only Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask
277. scriber to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port some IEEE 802 1X clients do this automatically Use off to not require a subscriber to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port This command sets whether or not a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the specified port 30 2 9 Port Period Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dotlx gt port period lt port gt lt value gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 lt value gt How often 60 65535 seconds a subscriber has to re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port This command sets how often a subscriber has to re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the specified port 30 2 10 Port Status Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dotlx gt port status lt port gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 This command displays the current status of the IEEE 802 1X security feature on the specified port 30 2 11 RADIUS IP Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dotlx gt radius ip lt addr gt where IEEE 802 1X Commands 30 3 IES 1000 User s Guide lt addr gt The IP address of the external RADIUS server This command sets the external RADIUS server IP address 30 2 12 RADIUS Port Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dotlx gt radius port lt portnum gt where lt portnum gt T
278. se only power wires of the required diameter for connecting the IES 1000 to a power supply refer to the hardware specifications in the appendices for the required wire diameter The IES 1000 power connections are at the left end of the front panel of the IES 1000 chassis 6 6 1 Procedure to Connect the Power When installing the IES 1000 power wire push the wire firmly into the terminal as deep as possible and make sure that no exposed bare wire can be seen or touched Step 1 Connect one end of a power wire to the 48V power terminal on the front panel of your IES 1000 and tighten the terminal screw Step 2 Connect the other end of the power wire to the 48V terminal on the power supply Step 3 Repeat the previous step for the terminal labeled RTN Hardware Connections 6 13 6 14 IES 1000 User s Guide AAA Ex ress ZyXEL 1P 000 INPUT OUTPUT ON OFF a 1 O RSSA L RN IN y Figure 6 14 Connecting IES 1000 Power Hardware Connections IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 7 Turning On the IES 1000 This chapter discusses the fans and LEDs of the IES 1000 after you turn it on 7 1 Introduction Before turning on your IES 1000 make sure you e Have attached a computer to the IES 1000 serial port as explained previously e Can see the status LEDs on the front panel Push the power switch located at the front of the IES 1000 to the ON or position You may also need to turn on
279. sh 10 5 12 IEEE 802 1X Authentication Introduction IEEE 802 1X is an extended authentication protocol that allows support of RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server RADIUS RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to At the time of writing only Windows XP and Windows 2000 with service pack four of the Microsoft operating systems supports it See the Microsoft web site for information on other Windows operating system support For other operating systems see its documentation If your operating system does not support IEEE 802 1X then you may need to install IEEE 802 1X client software Not available at the time of writing Getting Started Screens 10 17 IES 1000 User s Guide the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS authentication allows you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location MT Client RADIUS Server Figure 10 17 RADIUS Server 10 5 13 802 1X Setup Screen Click 802 1X in the Bridge Setup screen to open this screen 802 1X Setup FT 802 1X Enable Apply PortNumber Active Control Reauthentication a No auto on 3600 No auto on 3600 No auto on 3
280. shfs 192 168 1 1 flashfs gt wipe 192 168 1 1 flashfs gt update 13 Wait for the update to complete and then restart the network module Firmware Upload and Recovery 36 5 IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 37 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies After each problem description some 37 1 steps are provided to help you to diagnose and to solve the problem SHDSL or ADSL LED s An SHDSL or ADSL LED is not on Table 37 4 Troubleshooting the DSL LED s STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure the DSL port is enabled and properly configured refer to Chapter 25 and Chapter 24 2 Connect a DSL modem directly to the DSL port of the network module using a different telephone wire Ifthe LED turns on go to step 4 3 Check to see that the settings in the DSL modem or router match those of the DSL port refer to Chapter 25 and Chapter 24 If the DSL LED stays off there may be a problem with the port Contact the distributor 4 Take the DSL modem to the subscriber s location If the DSL LED stays off check for a problem with the telephone wiring that connects to the subscriber 37 2 Data Transmission The SHDSL or ADSL LED is on but data cannot be transmitted Table 37 2 Troubleshooting Data Transmission STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION Check to see that the VPI VCI settings in the subscriber s DSL modem or router match those in the network modu
281. specific static VLAN getnames Displays the name of all static VLANs cpu lt vid gt Registers the CPU port to the specified VLAN ID sets the management VLAN list Shows all static VLAN settings vlan enable disable Enables or disables the VLAN status Shows the VLAN s current status Commands Introduction 22 17 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION list Shows the VLAN s current status periodically stop Stops showing the VLAN s current status periodically pvid Lists the default port VLAN ID for all ports lt portNo gt lt vid gt Sets the default port VLAN ID for a specific port priority port Lists the default priority for all ports lt portNo gt lt priority gt Sets the default priority for a specific port regen port Lists the mapping of the incoming user priority to regen priority lt portNo gt lt user pri gt lt reg pri gt Sets the mapping of the incoming user priority to regen priority 22 18 Commands Introduction IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 23 System Commands This chapter describes the IES 1000 s system related commands 23 1 System Commands Overview Use the commands described in this chapter to configure system functions on the IES 1000 23 2 Commonly Used Commands This section shows you commonly used commands 23 2 1 Uptime Command Syn
282. ss the network The IES 1000 propagates VLAN information to other devices when this check box is selected VLAN Select All if you want the port to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames on this Acceptable port Choose Tagged if you want the port to accept just tagged incoming frames on this Frame Type port Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link in the navigation panel on the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 12 8 4 Add GSHDSL N wire Group Click Add in the Port Setup screen under the n wire table to go to the Add G SHDSL N wire Group screen Add N wire Group N wire Group Name Mode 4 wire STU C Group Number 2 Apply Reset Figure 12 6 Add G SHDSL N wire Group 7 At the time of writing GVRP is not available with the DSL ports At the time of writing the VLAN Acceptable Frame Type field is read only The IES 1000 accepts both tagged and untagged incoming frames G SHDSL Mod ule Port Setup 12 9 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 12 6 Add G SHDSL N wire Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Setup Click this link to go to the Port Setup screen N wire Group Type a name to identify this n wire group Name Mode Select how many wires
283. sts 29 2 3 Delete Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt delete lt ip gt all where lt ip gt The IP address of a DHCP server all All of the DHCP servers in the relay list DHCP Relay Commands 29 1 IES 1000 User s Guide The delete command removes the specified DHCP server or all servers from the list of servers to which the IES 1000 relays client TCP IP configuration requests 29 2 4 Syntax Enable Command 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt enable This command turns on the DHCP relay feature 29 2 5 Syntax Disable Command 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt disable This command turns off the DHCP relay feature 29 2 6 Syntax Reset Command 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt reset The reset command resets and restarts the DHCP relay feature This causes changes that you have made to the DHCP relay list to take effect 29 2 7 Syntax Pool Command 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt pool The poo1 command shows the DHCP relay memory pool status An example is shown next This display shows that the entire DHCP relay memory pool is free none of the memory is allocated for entries 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt pool DHCP relay Memory Pool Status total pool size 19968 free 19968 allocated 0 mean alloc chunk 0 max free chunk 19952 Figure 29 1 Pool Command Example 29 2 DHCP Relay Commands IES 1000 User s Guide 29 2 8 Status Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dhcprelay gt status
284. t lt vci gt Disables the specified PVC channel s chs lt start port gt lt stop Disables all PVC channels for the port gt specified ports port lt port gt Disables the specified ADSL port ports Disables all ADSL ports ldly ldly lt ports port number gt Sets or displays the maximum line lt downstream value gt lt upstream delay value gt lt Symbol MilliSec gt linedata lt port gt Shows the line bit allocation of the specified ADSL port lineinfo lt port gt Shows the line operating values of the specified ADSL port lineperf lt port gt Shows the line quality of the specified ADSL port linerate lt port gt Shows the line rate parameters of the specified ADSL port set ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt lt pvid gt Creates a new PVC channel or lt priority gt lt vcp name gt modifies an existing one ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt super lt vcp name gt Creates a super channel or modifies an existing one profile lt name gt fast lt atur max rate gt lt atuc max rate gt ldly lt atur delay gt lt atuc delay gt lt atur gt lt atuc gt Sets an ADSL line configuration profile port lt port gt lt profile gt lt mode gt Applies a profile setting and operational mode to an ADSL port ports lt profile gt lt mode gt Applies a profile setting and operational mode to all ADSL ports pvc lt port gt lt muxMode gt lt txvpi gt
285. t information Option 82 feature status Displays the current status of the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 feature add lt info gt Adds the specified information for the relay agent dot1x enable Turns on 802 1X security disable Turns off 802 1X security status Displays the 802 1X security status debug level Turns the debug level on or off port enable lt port gt Enables 802 1X security on the specified port Commands Introduction 22 7 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION disable lt port gt Disables 802 1X security on the specified port control lt port gt lt auto auth Sets how the specified port should be unauth gt authenticated reauth lt port gt lt on off gt Turns re authentication on or off on the specified port period lt port gt lt value gt Configures how often the specified port should be re authenticated status lt port gt Displays 802 1X security status on the specified port radius ip lt addr gt Sets the external RADIUS server IP address port lt portnum gt Sets the external RADIUS server port number secret lt secret gt Sets the authentication and encryption key show Displays the external RADIUS server settings edd version Displays Ethernet device driver information test lt ip gt Enables a ping based Ethernet work around set timeout lt of minutes gt Sets th
286. t Based VLAN 10 5 Number of Resource Management 13 4 Port based VLAN Port Filter 10 5 Number of Resource Management Cells 13 7 Port Based VLAN Port Filter 28 5 N wire 12 9 25 10 Portfilter Command 28 5 N wire Mode 12 1 Ports 3 2 O POTS xxi 24 13 Online Registration xxi Power 6 13 Operating Environment 4 1 Power Consumption H Operational mode 24 13 Power Switch 7 1 Operational Mode 24 12 Power Wires 5 1 6 13 Overheating Detection Warning and Safegaurd 1 4 Preface xxi P Priority Port Command 32 1 Parity Byte Assignment 24 5 Profile 11 1 12 1 Parity Bytes Per Codeword 24 5 Profile Add 11 6 12 6 Passwd Command 23 1 Profile Edit Screen 11 6 12 6 Password 2 1 9 1 34 1 Profile Name 11 5 11 6 12 6 12 7 PCR 13 4 13 7 Profiles 11 1 12 1 Peak Cell Rate 13 4 13 7 PSD region 25 5 Physical Interfaces G PSD Region 12 5 12 6 12 7 Pin Assignments E Punch Down Tool 6 5 RJ 11 Console Port E PVID 13 10 31 4 RJ 11 SHDSL Port E PVID Command 31 3 RJ 45 LAN Port F Q Ping Command 33 2 Quality of Service QOS 13 3 Pool Command 29 2 R Port Bonding 1 2 12 2 12 10 Rack Mounting 4 2 Port Control Command 30 2 Precautions 4 1 N Index IES 1000 User s Guide Rack Mounted IES 1000 Installation 4 1 Route Flush Command 33 4 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User RTN 6 13 Service 10 17 rt VBR 13 4 13 7 RADIUS IP Command 30 3 s RADIUS Port Command 30 4 Safety Warnings A RADIUS Secret Command ao SAM 1008 Network Modules 5 1 RADIUS Show
287. t group list gt Bonds the specified member list and sets them to STU C mode bondr lt bond name gt lt port list gt Bonds the specified member list and sets them to STU R mode or bondr lt mode gt lt bond name gt lt group list gt nwirec lt mode gt lt group name gt Bundles the specified ports into an n lt group gt wire group set to STU C mode nwirer lt mode gt lt group name gt Bundles the specified ports into an n lt group gt wire group set to STU R mode pvc lt portNo gt lt muxMode gt lt txvpi gt lt txvci gt lt rxvpi gt lt rxvci gt Sets the PVC configuration to the specified GSHDSL port pvcs lt muxMode gt lt txvpi gt lt txvci gt lt rxvpi gt lt rxvci gt Sets the PVC configuration to all GSHDSL ports vcp lt profile name gt lt encap gt lt aal gt lt class gt lt pcr gt lt cdvt gt lt scr mcr gt lt bt nrm gt Creates a VC profile delete profile lt profile gt Deletes the specified profile profiles Deletes all profiles except the DEFVAL profile bond lt bond name gt Deletes the specified bonding group nwire lt group name gt Deletes the specified n wire group ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt Deletes the specified PVC channel chs lt start port gt lt stop Deletes all PVC channels for the port gt specified ports vcp lt profile name gt Deletes a specific VC profile vcps Deletes all
288. t oper mode gt where lt profile name gt The profile that will define the settings of this port lt oper mode gt Operational mode Choose from glite gdmt t1413 or auto for Annex A Choose from anxb etsi or auto for Annex B The set ports command assigns a specific profile to all of the ADSL ports and sets all of the ports to one mode or standard The profile defines the maximum and minimum upstream downstream rates the target upstream downstream signal noise margins and the maximum and minimum upstream downstream acceptable noise margins of all the ADSL ports The mode parameter specifies the standard that this port is allowed When set to auto the AAM1008 follows whatever mode is set on the other end of the line An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 adsl gt set ports gold auto This command sets all ofthe ADSL ports to have the gold profile The results of this command are reflected when you use the list profiles command When the mode is set to auto and the negotiated mode is G lite if the configured rates exceed those allowed by G lite the actual rates are governed by G lite regardless of the configured numbers 24 3 20 Show Port Command Syntax show port lt port number gt ADSL Commands 24 13 IES 1000 User s Guide where lt port number gt A port number from 1 to 8 The show port command shows the line status up or down the actual upstream downstream rates and mode of an indivi
289. t port gt Link WARN An ADSL port lost its connection Down SN lt seq no gt lt port gt port number lt seq no gt sequence number of the connection ADSL lt port gt Link WARN An ADSL port established a connection Up SN lt seq no gt lt us Hares cae TAte gt lt ds rate gt downstream rate lt us rate gt upstream rate Insecure SNMP From lt ip WARN Someone tried to start an SNMP session from an IP address that did addr gt not match any of the configured secured client IP addresses Incorrect SNMP WARN Someone attempted to use the wrong password to start an SNMP Password session CONSOLE Session End INFO A console session has terminated CONSOLE Session Begin INFO A console session has started FTP Session End INFO An FTP session has terminated FTP Session Begin INFO An FTP session has started Insecure FTP From lt ip WARN Someone tried to start an FTP session from the listed IP address and addr gt it did not match any of the configured secured client IP addresses Collision at WARN Someone attempted to use FTP or the web configurator to upload downloading file firmware but the upload conflicted with another process maybe someone else was using another method to upload firmware at the same moment Incorrect FTP Password WARN Someone attempted to use the wrong password to start an FTP session Reboot System WARN The network module is restarting after a firmware upload via FTP or console port or due to a command invoked b
290. t port number gt where lt port number gt port number from to 8 The disable port command forcibly disables the specified ADSL port The factory default of all ports is disabled A port must be enabled before data transmission can occur An enabled but disconnected ADSL port generates more heat than an operating port To minimize heat generation and to enhance reliability remember to disable a port when it is not in use 24 3 3 Disable Ports Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt disable ports The disable ports command forcibly disables all ADSL ports The factory default of all ports is disabled A port must be enabled before data transmission can occur An enabled but disconnected ADSL port generates more heat than an operating port To minimize heat generation and to enhance reliability remember to disable a port when it is not in use 24 3 4 Enable Port Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt enable port lt port number gt where lt port number gt A port number from to 8 The enable port command forcibly enables the specified ADSL port The factory default of all ports is disabled A port must be enabled before data transmission can occur An enabled but disconnected ADSL port generates more heat than an operating port To minimize heat generation and to enhance reliability remember to disable a port when it is not in use 24 2 ADSL Commands IES 1000 User s Guide 24 3 5 Enable Ports Command
291. t port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information 1 is used if you leave this blank lt stop port gt The last port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information 8 is used if you leave this blank The show chs command displays the contents of all PVC channels for the specified ports The following example displays the contents of the PVC channels for ports 5 to 8 192 168 1 1 adsl gt show chs 5 8 PRIORITY VC profile name ENABLE DEFVAL DEFVAL DEFVAL gold Figure 26 4 Chow Channel Command Example 26 3 6 Enable Channel Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt enable ch lt port gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 or means all 8 ports lt vpi gt The VPI setting 0 to 255 lt vci gt The VCI setting 32 to 65535 if vpi 0 or 1 to 65535 if the vpi does not 0 The enable ch command turns on the specified PVC channel The following example turns on the PVC channel for port 8 that uses VPI 0 and VCI 33 192 168 1 1 adsl gt enable ch 8 0 33 26 3 7 Enable Channels Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 adsl gt enable chs lt start port gt lt stop port gt 26 6 Virtual Channel Management IES 1000 User s Guide where lt start port gt The first port number in a range of ports for which you want to display line information 1 is used if you leave this blank lt stop port gt The last port number in a
292. tabase 28 5 2 Mfilter Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt mfilter This command displays the multicast filtering database The mfilter command is what allows you to monitor the IES 1000 s IGMP snooping activities The following is an example of a multicast filtering database 192 168 1 1 bridge gt mfilter VLAN ID 239329372552930 7f ff fa 224 000 001 022 00 01 16 Total 2 entries IGMP Snooping Enabled IGMP version 1 Query Received 949 Max Response Time 100 1 10 seconds Query Interval 15 seconds Figure 28 1 Mfilter Command Example Bridge Commands 28 3 IES 1000 User s Guide where ID The location of the entry in the multicast filtering database VID The VLAN ID of the entry in the multicast filtering database GDA Group Destination Address The IP address of a multicast group destination MAC The last 3 bytes of the multicast MAC that the GDA is mapped to Member Ports The ports that belong to this multicast group 1 Ethernet 2 DSL port 1 3 DSL port 2 and so on IGMP version The version of IGMP being used in the network Query Received The number of query packets received by the IES 1000 Max Response Time The longest period of time used to respond to a query packet measured in tenths of a second Query Interval The time period between query packets 28 5 3 Filterage Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt filterage age where age The aging out timer period in se
293. tax 192 168 1 1 gt uptime This command shows the elapsed time the system has been running since the last reboot 23 2 2 Version Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gt version This command shows the system firmware version and date 23 2 3 Restart Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gt restart This command instructs the system to perform a warm start that is restarting the system without turning the power off and on 23 2 4 Passwd Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gt passwd System Commands 23 1 IES 1000 User s Guide This command changes the management password The management password is used for authentication at console or Telnet login This command is only allowed for local console management sessions The management password must be from 1 to 8 characters long and any character is accepted The factory default password is 1234 It is very important that you remember your password If you forget it refer to the Troubleshooting section for help 23 2 5 Config Print Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gt config print This command lists all current system configuration settings 23 2 6 Exit Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 gt exit This command terminates the console or telnet management session 23 3 Sys Commands 23 3 1 Info Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt info This command displays system related information 23 3 2 Set Name Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 sys gt set name lt name gt
294. tem no gt This is the index number of the log entry lt time gt This is the time and date when the log was created lt process gt This is the process that created the log lt type gt This identifies what kind of log it is INFO identifies for an information log WARN identifies a warning log lt log message gt This is the log s detailed information see section 20 3 1 for descriptions 20 3 1 Log Messages The following table lists and describes the system log messages Table 20 3 Log Messages LOG MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION ADSL lt port gt Reset INFO The network module reset an ADSL port due to a software layer error ADSL lt port gt Dying Gasp INFO The subscriber turned off the ADSL modem or router The subscriber s device must support the dying gasp feature in order for this log to display ADSL Link Info lt us INFO An ADSL port established a connection NM gt lt ds NM gt lt us lt us NM gt t AttainableSpeed gt lt ds Us Upstream NoiSe margin AttainableSpeed gt lt ds NM gt downstream noise margin lt us AttainableSpeed gt maximum possible upstream speed for this line lt ds AttainableSpeed gt maximum possible downstream speed for this line 20 2 Diagnostics IES 1000 User s Guide Table 20 3 Log Messages LOG MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION ADSL l
295. tents vii IES 1000 User s Guide 5 1 Removing a G SHDSL SAM1008 Network Module oooconooccnoccooonoonononononoconcoon ccoo ncon nono noconocon nono nccnnnnos 5 1 5 2 Installing a Network Module iii tt A A AA ads 5 2 Hardware Connections and TroubleshootiNY ooomcccccc n ninociconononnnnnnncn eee ea enee cece eee ea eeae ee ee ee ea ea nnn gees eesea ea saaeaeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees ll Chapter 6 Hardware Connections tit ati en aie Bnet alae a tae heey 6 1 6 1 Front Panel Connections 5 5 cd0icassigscanecascddeahsaseazencvcntesdaconbonsdelssaterdenpsesdensoncdetessasadepyecadodgaonsausesencneeeuary 6 1 6 2 Console Portes isoceiececes de sds ashe ghas Sida ves boea dance A A iia 6 1 6 3 SHDSL Port Connect Ons ii A A 6 2 64 ADSL Port Connections A A ead acti 6 5 6 5 AC Power Model Power Connection cceceesssssceseeseeeececesaeeeecesecaeeeceeseceaeeaeeeecaeeaeseeseeeeaeceeeneeaeenaees 6 12 6 6 DC Power Model Power Connections ccceecceseesssesceseeseeseeeeeesecaeeecesecaaeeaeesecaecaeeeceaecaeeeneeaeenaeenees 6 13 Chapter 7 Turning On the lES 1000 cercare ir radar 7 1 7 1 NAS NO 7 1 7 2 Network Module Front Panel LEDS ooonconncniconncncnncnncnncnnconononncnnncnnonononncnn cnn nonncn nc nn crac arrancan ncnncns 7 1 Chapter 8 Hardware Troubleshooting oooooocccccnnocccinnnoncccnononcccnononccc nono nono eerie cc naar nn nn naar nn rra nn nr cnn nn nn daunna aa 8 1 8 1 System AU lin IIS AS diia TE os 8 1 8 2 The AL
296. ter the Ethernet subsystem by entering the ethernet command When you are in a subsystem the system reminds you by including the subsystem name in the command prompt for example 192 168 1 1 ethernet gt To get back to the top level prompt from a subsystem use the home command 22 3 Command Syntax Conventions The command keywords are in courier new font 1 The command keywords must be entered exactly as shown that is no abbreviations are allowed 2 The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt for instance list port lt port gt means that you must specify the port number for this command 3 The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets for instance config save means that the save field is optional 4 A means or Commands Introduction 22 1 IES 1000 User s Guide on off means that you can use either on or off 5 Command refers to a command used in the command line interface CI command Using commands not documented in this User s Guide can damage the unit and possibly render it unusable 22 3 1 Help Facility The system includes a help facility to provide you with online assistance You can issue the help or help all command at any time The system will display a list of available commands in response You can issue help with a command name to get more details about it for instance the command 192 168 1 1 gt help version
297. the DSL modem from the wall jack and connect the telephone to the wall jack If there is no dial tone then there is a problem with the building wiring between the DSL subscriber s home and the MDF Contact your telephone company for troubleshooting Hardware Troubleshooting 8 5 Getting Started Part III Getting Started This part tells how to access and navigate the web configurator It also describes the Getting Started web configurator screens IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 9 Web Configurator Access and Navigation This chapter describes how to log into the web configurator and navigate through it 9 1 Web Configurator Overview The embedded web configurator allows you to manage the switch from anywhere on the network through a browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator use Internet Explorer 5 5 and later or Netscape Navigator 6 and later versions 9 2 Accessing the Web Configurator Use the following instructions to log on to the web configurator 9 2 1 Password Screen Step1 Start your web browser Step 2 Type http and the IP address of the DSL module for example the default is 192 168 1 1 in the Location or Address field Press Enter Step 3 The Password screen now appears Type the user name admin and your password default 1234 in the respective fields Enter Network Password 2 xi D gt Please type your user name and password Site Re
298. the power supply The IES 1000 will automatically run a self test that takes approximately 20 seconds The SYS LED will remain on if your IES 1000 has started normally If the SYS LED does not turn on then recheck your connections or refer to the Hardware Troubleshooting chapter Make sure you can feel and or hear the fans working working fans emit a low buzz and blow air The fans are located on the IES 1000 as shown next Refer to the Hardware Troubleshooting chapter to test the fans if they are not working See the next section to interpret the operational status of your IES 1000 Figure 7 1 Location of the IES 1000 Fans 7 2 Network Module Front Panel LEDs The following figures show the front panels of the network modules LEDs describe the operational status of your network module Please also refer to the Hardware Troubleshooting chapter to see how LEDs may aid in troubleshooting Turning On the IES 1000 7 1 IES 1000 User s Guide Figure 7 2 SAM1008 Front Panel LEDs AJAJAJA AJAJAJA mieie CD I Figure 7 3 AAM1008 Front Panel LEDs Table 7 1 Network Module LED Descriptions LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION ALM Red On The module has overheated Off The module is functioning within normal temperature parameters SYS Green Blinking The system is initializing On The module is on and functioning properly Off The system is not receiving power is not re
299. thernet filter Shows the NP filter table address lt addr gt Selects the PHY address in the SMI bus Commands Introduction 22 5 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 22 1 Commands MODULE COMMAND DESCRIPTION read lt addr gt Reads the MII register of the device with the selected PHY address write lt addr gt lt data gt Writes data to the MII register of the device with selected the PHY address chips cpu Shows CPU usage debug Starts debug mode ATMOS exit Exits the debugger ATMOS info Shows version information and MAC address mem Shows memory usage on a per process basis stack Shows stack usage on a per process basis rb lt addr gt Reads 1 byte from the specified address rh lt addr gt Reads 1 half word from the specified address rw lt addr gt Reads 1 word from the specified address wb lt addr gt lt data gt Writes 1 byte to the specified address wh lt addr gt lt data gt Writes 1 half word to the specified address ww lt addr gt lt data gt Writes 1 word to the specified address tell lt process gt lt cmd gt lt attrs gt Sends a tell command to the specified process config list Displays all registered modules print Shows configuration information for all modules lt module gt Shows configuration information for the specified module reset Resets configuration information in all modules
300. ting Started Screens chapter for background information on the port filter 28 6 1 Portfilter Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 bridge gt portfilter lt source port gt all lt dest ports gt where lt source port gt An incoming bridge port number all gt All bridge ports are allowed outgoing ports lt dest ports gt The outgoing bridge ports Separate by a space if there is more than one port This command sets or displays the port based VLAN configuration An example is shown next 192 168 1 1 gt bridge 192 168 1 1 bridge gt portfilter Port 1 ernet all Port ays Port 2073 Port Port Port Port Port 2 3 4 Port 5 6 7 8 9 PRPRPPRPRPER 3 14 Ss 6 7 8 Figure 28 2 Portfilter Command Example The above shows the current configuration of the port based VLAN It is the same as the default settings Bridge Commands 28 5 IES 1000 User s Guide An example with an altered configuration is shown next 192 168 1 1 gt bridge 192 168 1 1 bridge gt portfilter 2 1 3 192 168 1 1 bridge gt portfilter 3 1 2 This example sets the allowed outgoing bridge ports of port 2 DSL port 1 to port 1 Ethernet port and port 3 DSL port 2 The allowed outgoing bridge ports of port 3 DSL port 2 are set to port 1 Ethernet port and port 2 DSL port1 This way DSL ports 2 and 3 can communicate with each other and the Ethernet port You can see the effects of this example by using the followi
301. tion MANAGER SNMP AGENT AGENT AGENT Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device Figure 16 1 SNMP Management Model An SNMP managed network consists of two main component types agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the IES 1000 An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the station through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes operations that control and monitor the managed devices The managed devices contain objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include the number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information SNMP 16 1 IES 1000 User s Guide Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 16 1 SNMP COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a tab
302. to make sure that the subscriber is able to transmit to the IES 1000 Make sure the computer behind the DSL device has the correct gateway IP address configured Check the IES 1000 s VLAN configuration see the VLAN chapter Check the cable and connections between the IES 1000 and the local server oo AJOJN Try to access another local server If data can be transmitted to a different local server the original local server that could not be accessed may have a problem 21 9 SNMP The SNMP manager server cannot get information from the IES 1000 Table 21 8 Troubleshooting the SNMP Server STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Ping the IES 1000 from the SNMP server If you cannot check the cable connections and IP configuration 2 Check to see that the community or trusted host in the IES 1000 matches the SNMP server s community If these steps fail to correct the problem contact the distributor 21 10 Telnet I cannot telnet into the IES 1000 Table 21 9 Troubleshooting Telnet STEPS CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 Make sure that a telnet session is not already operating The IES 1000 only accepts one telnet session at a time 2 Make sure that the IP address of the computer you are using matches a range of secured hosts configured in Secured Client under Maintenance in the IES 1000 The IES 1000 immediately disconnects the telnet session if they do not match 3 Ping the
303. up Acceptable Frame Whether tagged only or both untagged frames are accepted on this Type port Port Filtering If set the IES 1000 discards incoming frames for VLANs which do not include this port in its member set 15 7 VLAN Setup The web configurator allows you to configure VLAN settings for the individual cards 15 8 Static VLAN Setup Screen Click VLAN Setup in the navigation panel to open this screen This menu displays IEEE 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the IES 1000 VLAN Static Entry Setup VLAN Enable Management VLAN ID fi Apply VLAN ID Name Active Delete Add Delete Figure 15 1 Static VLAN Setup The following table describes this screen Table 15 2 Static VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Enable Select this check box to turn on the VLAN and permit VLANs groups beyond the local switch At the time of writing enabling VLAN also enables GVRP on the Ethernet port 15 4 VLAN IES 1000 User s Guide Table 15 2 Static VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Management The management VLAN ID is the number of the VLAN through which you manage the IES VLAN ID 1000 The management VLAN defines which ports you can use to manage the IES 1000 You cannot manage the IES 1000 via a port that is not a member of the management VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if
304. use another level and send them the results Enter the command without a level to turn off all of the debug levels This command turns individual debug levels on or off 30 2 5 Port Enable Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dotlx gt port enable lt port gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 This command turns on the IEEE 802 1X security feature on the specified port s 30 2 6 Port Disable Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dotlx gt port disable lt port gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 This command turns off the IEEE 802 1X security feature on the specified port s 30 2 7 Port Control Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dotlx gt port control lt port gt lt autolauth unauth gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 lt auto auth un This field sets how the IES 1000 uses IEEE 802 1X Use auto to authenticate auth gt all subscribers before they can access the network through this port Use auth to allow all connected users to access the network through this port without authentication Use unauth to deny all subscribers access to the network through this port This command sets how the IES 1000 applies IEEE 802 1X on a specified port 30 2 IEEE 802 1X Commands IES 1000 User s Guide 30 2 8 Port Re authentication Command Syntax 192 168 1 1 dotlx gt port reauth lt port gt lt on off gt where lt port gt A port number 1 to 8 lt on off gt Use on to require a sub
305. valid range is from 0 to 4096 0 means this feature is disabled so the switch will learn MAC addresses up to the limit of 4096 Getting Started Screens 10 11 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 10 10 MAC Count Filter Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Static MAC Use this field to limit the number of MAC addresses that may be statically specified for this port Count For example if you are configuring port 2 and you set this field to 5 then only five device MAC addresses may be statically configured on port 2 at any one time The valid range is from 0 to 5 0 means no MAC addresses may be statically specified for this port Click Apply to save your changes back to the IES 1000 s volatile memory The IES 1000 loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Config Save link on the navigation panel to the left to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 5 5 Bridge MAC Address Record Screen Click MAC Address Record in the Bridge Setup screen to open this screen This screen displays a list of the MAC addresses that have connected to each individual port on the network module The listing includes MAC addresses and the connected time measured in seconds for each port Bridge MAC Address Record Setup Aging Time Aging Time 300 Apply MAC Address Record List Ethernet
306. wer ports of MDF 1 using regular telephone wires Connect the upper ports of MDF to the telephone company Telephone subscribers only that is non ADSL subscribers retain connections to the lower ports of MDF 1 Step 10 Change the wiring from MDF 1 to MDF 3 for telephone subscribers who want ADSL service Hardware Connections 6 9 IES 1000 User s Guide 6 4 4 Installation Scenario C Phone service is also available but there are two MDFs one for end user telephone line connections and the other one for CO telephone line connections see the following figure Users A and B have telephone only service Figure 6 10 Two Separate MDFs for End user and CO Connections Please refer to the following figure for the ADSL connection schema gt MDFs and 2 are the two original MDFs gt MDFs 3 and 4 are two additional MDFs you need User A still has telephone service only User B now has ADSL service also see the following figure 6 10 Hardware Connections IES 1000 User s Guide ES 1 2 3 4 USER 5 6 7 8 ADSL F 7 r 1 1 5 7 al J L al al El L w QOG CONSOLE F co MDF 4 MDF 3 Telephone cables MDE 2 POTS splitter User with telephone only
307. width 13 4 2 Traffic Parameters These are the parameters that control the flow of ATM traffic Peak Cell Rate PCR Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed 13 4 Virtual Channel Management IES 1000 User s Guide Sustained Cell Rate SCR Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR Maximum Burst Size MBS Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again Minimum Cell Rate MCR Minimum Cell Rate MCR is the minimum rate at which the sender can send cells If the PCR SCR or MBS is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR MCR and MBS amp tv 8 PCR SCR MCR e a Time MBS MBS Figure 13 2 PCR SCR MCR and MBS in Traffic Shap
308. y Delay 4ms Target Signal Noise Ratio 6 db 11 2 ADSL Module Port Setup IES 1000 User s Guide Maximum Signal Noise Ratio 31 db Minimum Signal Noise Ratio 0 db Minimum Transmission Rate 32 Kbps Maximum Transmission Rate 2048 Kbps Upstream ADSL settings Latency Delay 4ms Target Signal Noise Ratio 6 db Maximum Signal Noise Ratio 31 db Minimum Signal Noise Ratio O db Minimum Transmission Rate 32 Kbps Maximum Transmission Rate 512 Kbps 11 7 2 Other Default Settings The factory default settings for all ADSL ports of the IES 1000 are Encapsulation RFC 1483 Multiplexing LLC based VPI 0 VCI 33 Enable Disable State disabled Operational mode auto 11 8 ADSL Module Port Setup Screen Click Port Setup in the navigation panel to open the Port Setup screen This screen is a summary screen that displays read only information about the ports Click a port s name to go to a setup screen for that port ADSL Module Port Setup 11 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Pon Setup Port Number Active Auto Neg Speed Duplex ves yes NIA NIA Keene Active Name Profile Mode ia oe aos Channels No DEFVAL Auto 512 2048 1 No DEFVAL Auto 512 2048 1 No DEFVAL Auto 512 2048 1 No DEFVAL Auto 512 2048 1 No DEFVAL Auto 512 2048 1 No DEFVAL Auto 512 2048 1 No DEFVAL Auto 512 2048 1 No DEFVAL Auto 12 2048 1 Figure 11 1 ADSL Port Setup The following table describes this screen
309. y an administrator Received Image WARN A checksum error was detected during an attempted FTP firmware Checksum Error upload Invalid Image WARN Someone attempted to use FTP upload a firmware file with a wrong identity File Size Too Large WARN The file size was too large with an attempted FTP firmware upload Receive lt file name gt OK WARN A file was uploaded to the network module by FTP lt file name gt received file s name GSHDSL WARN The temperature detected in the G SHDSL module was too high OVER HEAT ACTIVE zi E t t hen th t d ones emp temperature when the entry was logge GSHDSL WARN The temperature detected in the G SHDSL module has come back to OVER HEAT RELEASE normal lt temp gt lt temp gt temperature when the entry was logged Diagnostic 20 3 IES 1000 User s Guide Table 20 3 Log Messages LOG MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION GSHDSL lt port gt Link INFO This log displays information about a G SHDSL port s connection Info NM lt noise boris rt b margin gt ATT lt loop po pornos attenuation gt lt noise margin gt the connection s signal quality in dB lt loop attenuation gt the connection s line loss in dB GSHDSL lt port gt Link WARN A G SHDSL port established a connection Up SN lt seq no gt P a b fth ti rate lt rate gt kbps seq no gt sequence number of the connection lt r
310. y of a tagged frame from a specified ingress port from the original user priority to the regenerated priority To display the regeneration table simply use the Regen Port command without parameters as shown next 192 168 1 1 vlanlg gt regen port 32 2 IEEE 802 1p Priority Commands IES 1000 User s Guide Chapter 33 IP Commands This chapter shows you how to configure the IP Internet Protocol parameters The IP host implementation in the IES 1000 allows you to manage it over the network More often than not you have more than one IES 1000 for a particular installation Before you start configuring the IES 1000s make sure that you 1 Plan ahead 2 Have a complete diagram showing the whole network 3 Record the IP parameters assigned to the equipment in your network 33 1 Setting the IP Address To set the IP address default gateway and the subnet mask of the Ethernet port of a network module use the following command sequence dy 192 168 1 1 gt ip 2 192 168 1 1 ip gt enabl ther lt new ip address gt lt ip mask gt 3 lt new ip address gt ip gt route delete default 4 lt new ip address gt ip gt route add default 0 0 0 0 lt default gateway gt 00 00 00 00 5 lt new ip address gt ip gt config save where lt new ip address gt The IP address you want to configure for the network module lt ip mask gt The subnet mask of the IP address you want to configure for the network module for exam

ZyXEL IES-1000 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents